Home

1 - &scaron;koda auto

1. Park assist 113 Fixing of the floor covering 75 Parking aid 112 foldable boot cover Combi 76 START STOP 118 Folding hooks 74 TCS 23 111 Light 56 A Auto Check Control 18 Removable lamp Combi 57 Automatic driving lamp control 49 see Boot lid l l 36 ABS Automatic aearbox 121 Unlocking of the boot lid Combi 37 Function TT i Variable loading floor 76 Warning light 23 Dynamic shift programme 124 A ri 194 Emergency programme 125 Boot lid 36 R Information for driving 121 Automatic locking 37 Active driver steering recommendation DSR __ 110 Kickdawn 124 Combi 37 Adjusting Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction Twindoor 36 Exterior mirror 64 steering wheel 123 Warning light 21 Adjusting seats 141 Parking 122 Brake assist 110 Adjustment Selector lever emergency unlocking 125 Brake booster 109 Seat 67 Selector lever lock 124 Brake fluid Aerial 168 Selector lever positions 122 Checking 181 see Radio reception 170 Starting off 122 Brake pads Airbag 148 Stopping 122 Indicator light 25 Deployment 148 Tiptronic 123 Brakes Front airbag 149 Automatic load deactivation 186 Brake assist systems 108 Head airbag 152 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila Handbrake 109 Knee airbag 150 tion 100 Indicator light 20 Side airbag 151 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 162 Runningin 158 Airbag system 148 Braking A
2. gt As soon as the following message is shown in the information display Steering intervent active Check area around veh let go of the steering wheel and the steering is taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully gt In the event that the parking procedure cannot be carried out in one go the parking process is completed in further stages When the arrow in the informa tion display is flashing towards the front Fig 123 c engage the 1st gear or move the selector lever to position D gt Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully drive forwards gt When the arrow in the information display is flashing towards the rear Fig 123 D engage the reverse gear or move the selector lever to the po sition R gt Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully reverse You can repeat these steps several times gt Terminate the parking procedure based on the distance information provided by the park assist system As soon as the parking procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the information display Steering interv finished Please take over steering Switch off park assist The park assist switches off during one of the following occurrences gt Speed of 30 km h exceeded gt Speed of 7 km
3. gt The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened by pulling once on the door opening lever gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle By pressing and holding down the symbol or on the rocker switch in the driv er s door the windows can be conveniently closed or opened 30 Using the system EI WARNING The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off Chil dren should never be left unattended in the vehicle since it is difficult to pro vide assistance from the outside when the doors are locked Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard i Note If the safe securing system is activated page 29 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate Introductory information You can use the remote control key to gt unlock and lock the vehicle gt unlock or open the boot lid gt open and close the windows page 42 Window convenience operation The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The operating range of the remote control key is approx 30 m But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak The key has a fold open key bit which can be used for u
4. a Only valid for the navigation system Columbus C Note CD change a The loudspeakers in the vehicle are adjusted to the power output of the radio and navigation system of 4x20 W The sound system equipment comprises loudspeakers that are adjusted to the amplifier power output of 4x50 W 6x25 W Fig 133 The CD changer AUX IN and MDI inputs The AUX IN input is located below the front armrest and is marked with AUX The MDI input is located below the front armrest The AUX IN and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources e g iPod The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the left side or mp3 player and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted ra compartment of the boot dio or navigation system aes Rea Inserting the CD For a description of use refer to the operating instructions for the relevant radio gt Touch the button C Fig 133 and guide the CD compact disc into the CD ee ayer case B The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD changer The indicator light in the corresponding button D stops flashing 138 Using the system Filling the CD changer with CDs gt Press and hold the button C Fig 133 for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one after the other maximum 6 CDs into the CD case B The indicator lights in the buttons D stop flashing Inserting a CD at a specific position gt Press the
5. Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof Switching on E WARNING gt Press the cover glass in the area of the symbol Fig 40 If the entry light is on do not touch its cover risk of burns i Switching off gt Press the cover glass in the area of the symbol O Operating with the door contact switch gt Place the cover glass in the middle position a are J P The light comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened If the lid remains open for more than about 10 minutes the boot light switches off automatically Fig 41 Front door Warning light The warning light is located in the lower door trim panel Fig 41 56 Using the system Reinserting the lamp the holder gt First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into place Operation of the lamp gt If you press the button A once the lamp lights up with 100 light intensity gt If you press the button A again the lamp lights up with 50 light intensity gt If you press the button A once again the lamp goes out CAUTION The removable lamp is not watertight and must therefore be protected against moisture it Note a f the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder it does not light up when the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged a If the lamp is not switched off an
6. Fig 186 Headlights Location of the bulbs Removing bulbs for the parking light and main beam Fig 187 Removing the bulb for the low beam First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 Overview of the location of the bulbs Fig 186 1 parking light and main beam 2 low beam light 3 front turn signal light Change the light bulb for the parking light gt Open the bonnet gt Remove the rubber cover 1 Fig 186 gt Remove the holder A Fig 186 gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one Fuses and light bulbs 211 Changing the bulb for the main beam gt Open the bonnet gt Remove the rubber cover 1 Fig 186 gt Push the circlips B together and unhook to the side gt Remove the holder c gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one gt Insert the rubber cover Installation is carried out in the reverse order Changing the bulb for the low beam gt Open the bonnet gt Remove the rubber cover 2 gt Turn the connector with the bulb in an anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove Fig 187 gt Replace the lamp insert the connector with the new bulb and turn in a clock wise direction to the the stop gt Insert the rubber cover Fog lights and daylight driving lights B3T 0536 Fig 188 Front bumper Cover fog lights with daylight driving lights Firs
7. Folding the seat backrest back into position gt If you removed the head restraint you need to reinsert it with the backrest til ted slightly forwards page 70 gt Place the rear outer seat belt C Fig 60 behind the edge of the side trim pan el gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking handle clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest F gt Make sure that the red pin B is hidden 1 If the front seats are too far back we recommend removing the rear head restraints before the seat backrests are folded forward to achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled Seats and Stowage 71 E WARNING a The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob jects in the boot can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged It is only then that the three point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function Fig 62 Rear seats Armrest CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back g
8. Parking aid Park assist Cruise control system CCS 66 77 79 81 82 83 84 85 91 91 93 93 94 94 97 100 103 103 105 108 112 112 112 113 T16 START STOP Fatigue detection system break recommendation Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox Communication Mobile phones and two way radio systems Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel Symbols in the information display Phone Phonebook Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl Voice control Multimedia Safety Passive Safety General information Correct seated position Seat belts Seat belts Airbag system Description of the airbag system Front airbags Driver s knee airbag Side airbags Head airbags Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Table of Contents 118 119 121 121 126 126 127 128 128 R8 131 135 137 140 140 141 144 144 148 148 149 150 151 152 152 154 154 Changing a wheel 196 Driving and the Environment ise UP Starting ue The first 1500 km 158 Towing the vehicle 204 Catalytic converter 158 Fuses and light bulbs 207 Economical and environmentally friendly Fuses 207 driving 159 Bulbs _ i OOUUUUUUUUUULLl8N Environmental compatibility 161
9. The following is displayed in the information display Gearbox overheated Stop Owner s man Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the symbol lt i disappears risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the symbol dis appears Problem with the engine oil pressure If the symbol A is shown in the information display you must have your vehicle checked immediately by a SKODA specialist garage The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 a If warning messages are shown in the information display these messages must be confirmed with the button B Fig 7 on page 16 on the windscreen wip er lever or with the button D on the multifunction steering wheel to call up the main menu a As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always indi cated again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver Overview The indicator lights show certain functions faults and may be accompanied by au dible signals When switching on the ignition some indicator lights illuminate briefly as a func tion test These indicator lights will disappear se
10. 168 Preserving and polishing the vehicle paintwork 169 Chrome parts 169 Paint damage SBD Plastic parts 169 De icing windows and exterior mirrors 170 Radio reception and aerial SO Headlight lenses 170 Rubber seals 170 Door lock cylinders SSS O Wheels 171 Underbody protection 171 Protection of hollow spaces S OTA Artificial leather and materials 172 Fabric covers on electrically heated seats 172 Natural leather TP Seat belts 173 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relat ing to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork We recommend using care products from KODA Original Accessories that are available from SKODA Service Partners The instructions for use on the package must be observed FJ wAaRNING a Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the in structions a Always store care products in a safe place out of the reach of children risk of poisoning a When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off risk of accident a Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts a Air fresheners and scents
11. A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded pet rol page 175 Unleaded petrol Information regarding the locations of filling sta tions that offer unleaded petrol is for example provided by the automobile asso ciations a D Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements 162 Driving Tips Driving through water on the street Fig 154 Driving through water The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water e g flooded roads gt Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of water The water level must fit around the strut on the side member as a maxi mum Fig 154 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into other parts of the vehicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off gt Deactivate the START STOP system before driving through water page 118 START STOP FJ warninec Driving through water mud sludge etc can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance risk of accident Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply
12. 43 Spare wheel Speedometer 193 190 Stabilisation Control ESC START STOP Function Starting engine Jump starting Starting the engine START STOP Jump starting Steering force assistance Steering wheel Stopping off the engine Storage T10 118 202 103 204 104 104 103 85 Storage compartments 85 Sun visors Switching lights on and off 58 49 7 Taking care of the vehicle Artificial leather Material coverings Materials Natural leather Seat belts Taking care of your vehicle Automatic car wash system Chrome parts Cleaning the wheels 172 172 172 172 173 167 168 169 171 Door lock cylinders Headlight lenses 170 170 High pressure cleaner 168 Plastic parts 169 Polishing the paintwork 169 Preservation 169 Rubber seals 170 Washing 168 Washing by hand 168 Wash system 168 TCS Function T1 Warning light 23 Technical data 216 Telephone 128 131 Through loading bag 90 Through loading channel 89 Tilting roof see Electric sliding tilting roof 43 Tiptronic 121 see automatic gearbox 123 Tool 196 TOP TETHER 156 Towing 204 Towing a trailer 164 Towing eye 205 Towing protection monitoring 34 Traction control system TCS 11 Trailer 164 Towing a trailer 164 Transport Boot 72 Roof rack system 81 Transporting childr
13. Controlling blower gt Turn the blower switch B into one of the positions 1 to 4 to switch the blower on gt Turn the blower switch B into position O to switch the blower off gt Press the button lt s 4 to close the fresh air supply Fig 108 Regulating the air distribution gt The direction of the inlet air flow is controlled with air distribution regulator page 94 Switching the cooling system on and off gt Press the button AQ 1 Fig 108 The indicator light lights up in the button gt When you again press the button AC the air conditioning system is switched off The indicator light in the button goes out Rear window heater gt Press the button 2 Further information page 58 Auxiliary heating parking heating gt Press the button 8 3 to directly switch on off the auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation Further information page 100 i Note a The whole heat output will be needed to defrost the windscreen and side win dows No warm air will be fed to the footwell This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort a The indicator light AC lights after activation even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system have been met page 94 Introductory infor mation By lighting up of the indicator light in the button the operational readi ness of the cooling system is signalled The air conditioning system 95 Setting the a
14. Fig 80 as far as the stop gt Fold the rear seats back into their original position CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 82 Roofload _ 8 EJ warninec a The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably at tached risk of accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps a Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a The handling properties of your vehicle change when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the displacement of the cen tre of gravity and the increased wind attack area risk of accident The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres a Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility weather road and traffic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and gross permissible weight of your vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of accident CAUTION Only use roof rack systems approved by KODA a f other roof rack systems are used or if the roof bars are not fitted correctly any resulting damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty It is therefore essential that the supplied fitting instructions for the roof rack system are ob served On models fitted with a power sliding t
15. Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km intra urban extra urban combined 7 CO emission levels combined in g km Nieee NH Type plate The type plate Fig 194 is located on the lower part of the column between the front and rear doors on the driver s side The type plate lists the following weights Maximum permissible gross weight 9 Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Operating weight The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only This value repre sents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equip ment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight H The payload consists of the following components gt Passengers gt All items of luggage and other loads gt Roof load including roof rack system gt Equipment not included in the operating weight gt Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer max 80 kg Measuring the fuel consumption and CO emissions according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins wi
16. doors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take sev eral hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system a f the Climatronic is running in automatic mode under certain conditions the engine may not switch off automatically Fatigue detection system break recommendation The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information about the steering behaviour to take a break from driving The system recommends a break at speeds of 65 km h to 200 km h After the ignition has been switched on the system evaluates the steering be haviour for 15 minutes This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the current steering behaviour If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possible fatigue of the driver it recommends to take a break from driving The symbol amp will appear in the information display for a few seconds and the fol lowing message will be displayed Break recommended An audible signal is also emitted The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following condi tions is met gt the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is turned off gt the seat belt taken off and the driver s door is opened gt the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes If none of the conditions for deleting the stored baseline analysis is met the sy
17. gt Position the lever upwards into position 3 Fig 47 Automatic wipe wash for windscreen gt Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into the spring tensioned position 5 Fig 47 the washer system is activated immediately while the windscreen wipers Start wiping a little later The wash system and the windscreen wiper op erate simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km h gt Release the lever The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for another 3 4 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen At a speed of more than 2 km h the wiper wipes once again 5 sec onds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the wind screen This feature can be activated deactivated by a SKODA specialist garage Rain sensor gt Place the lever in position 1 Fig 47 gt The sensitivity of the sensor can be set individually with the switch A Wiping the rear window pane Combi gt Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position 6 Fig 47 and the windscreen wiper will operate every 6 seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window Combi gt Press the lever completely away from the steering wheel into the spring ten sioned position 7 Fig 47 the washer system is activated immediately while the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later The wiper and washer system will operate as long as the lever is held in this position gt Re
18. 3 to display the remaining distance and days until the next service interval Fig 2 on page 8 A key symbol gt lt and the remaining distance appear for several seconds in the display At the same time the remaining days until the next service interval are displayed On vehicles which are equipped with the information display you can call up this display in the menu Settings page 16 Resetting Service Interval Display It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display if a service message or at least a pre warning is shown in the instrument cluster display We recommend that this reset is completed by a SKODA specialist garage The SKODA specialist garage gt Resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection gt Adds an entry to the Service Schedule gt Affixes the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the dashboard on the driver s side Reset the service interval display by using the reset button 7 Fig 2 on page 8 On vehicles which are equipped with the information display you can reset the Service Interval Display in the menu Settings page 16 CAUTION We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself as this can result in the incorrect setting of the Service Interval Display which can also cause possible problems with the operation of your vehicle Ria Note a Never reset the display between service intervals as this
19. 4 k Nile REl v e w 5 a Electric windows Central locking system Air outlet vents Lever for the multifunction switch gt Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher gt Speed regulating system Steering wheel gt With horn gt With driver s front airbag gt with pushbuttons for radio navigation system and mobile phone Instrument cluster Instruments and indicator lights Lever for the multifunction switch gt Multifunction display gt Windscreen wiper and wash system Air outlet vents Regulator for front left seat heating Switch for hazard warning lights Regulator for front right seat heating Depending on equipment fitted gt Radio gt Navigation system Storage compartment on the front passenger side Front passenger airbag Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag in front passenger storage compartment Electric exterior mirror adjustment Light switch Bonnet release lever 54 T16 149 127 137 iz es Os 3S 23 FS 3 8 S BJAR _ Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the head light beam range adjustment Storage compartment on the driver s side Lever for adjusting the steering wheel Driver s knee airbag Ignition lock TCS switch Tyre pressure monitoring system Depending o
20. Avoiding damage to your vehicle 162 Driving through water on the street ___ 163 Technical data 216 Towing 4 trailer 164 Introductory information 216 Towinga tiller 164 Data on the vehicle data sticker and the type plate 216 Dimensions 218 General Maintenance Specification and engine oil capacity 219 Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 167 Vehicle specific information depending on Taking care of your vehicle __ CSCSCS lt iS eal ype oo Multi purpose vehicles AF 224 Inspecting and replenishing 174 176 Engine compartment Vehicle battery 182 Wheels and Tyres 187 Tyres 187 Accessories changes and replacement of parts _ 194 Introductory information 194 Changes and impairments of the airbag system dG Do it yourself 195 First aid box 195 Warning triangle 195 Fire extinguisher 195 Vehicle tool kit 196 4 Table of Contents COzin g km discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilo meter N1 Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque TDI CR Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system TDI PD Diesel engine with injection system and unit injector injection system Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection Abbreviations Fig 1 Cockpit 6 Using the system Using the system Overview hi 2 3
21. Classification of child seats 155 Suitability of child seats 156 Child seats with the ISOFIX system 156 Child seat with the TOP TETHER system 156 Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory provi sions Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard must be used The ECE R Norm stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard have a test seal that cannot be removed a large E within a circle with the test number below FI WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Certain outside climatic con ditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a Under no circumstances allow children to be transported without the use of a suitable restraint system In the event of an accident the child will be thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries and also injure other occupants 154 Safety I WARNING Continued a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or
22. Fig 179 Jump starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot Fig 180 Detail of the engine compart ment Jump starting point First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 202 On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot the positive terminal of the bat tery supplying the power can only be connected to the jump starting point in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jump start ca ble Fig 180 gt Open the protective cap of the jump starting point in the direction of the arrow 204 Do it yourself gt Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the jump starting point gt Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid met al part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself gt Start the engine gt After starting the engine close the protective cap of the jump starting point CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye 205 Rear towing eye 206 Vehicles a towing device 206 Vehicles with manual transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the automatic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is
23. Fig 27 on page 45 and pressed forward for about K CAUTION 10 seconds E During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the panoramic sliding roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism E Note Fig 27 Control dial for the panoramic When the panoramic sliding roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the sliding roof wind noise is reduced Fig 28 Buttons for sun screen Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 27 Open partially gt Turn the switch to a position in area D Fig 27 Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B Fig 27 and hold it in this position spring ten sioned position The sun screen can be closed or opened separately using the buttons Fig 28 gt Unlocking and locking 45 Opening gt Briefly press the button E Fig 28 to open fully gt Press and hold the button E to open in the desired position The opening proc ess stops when one releases the button Closing gt Briefly press the button F Fig 28 to close fully gt Press and hold the button F to close in the desired position The closing proc ess stops when one releases the button E The panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen can also be operated from the out an T side using the remote control key or when using the KESSY system with the aid Fig 29 Point for positioning screwdriver opening
24. In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off F2 Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG F3 Measuring circuit F5 Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG F6 Not assigned CQ Introduction F7 Power supply for terminal 15 ignition on This chapter contains information on the following subjects F8 Radio F9 Not assigned Headlights 211 F10 Engine control unit Main relay Fog lights and daylight driving lights E F11 nan ean and ventilation control unit aaa Sa F12 Data us contro unit Licence plate light 24 F13 Engine control unit Licence plate light Combi 215 F14 Ignition F15 Lambda probe petrol engine glow plug system relay and fuel pump diesel engine Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason if uncertain we recommend that bulbs are replaced by a SKODA specialist garage or other expert help is sought 210 Do it yourself gt Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs The designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot FJ warnine a Accidents can be caused if the road in front
25. It is only possible to adjust the instrument lighting with the control dial if the light intensity drops below the set value of the light sensor m Fig 35 Dash panel Switch for hazard warning lights Fig 34 Dash panel Lights and visibility First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn gt Press switch A Fig 35 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off gt ings H on page 48 gt Switch on the light gt Turn the control dial Fig 34 to the desired width of illumination Lights and visibility 53 All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The indicator light for the turn signals and the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is de ployed in the event of an accident i Note The hazard warning light system must be switched on if for example you encounter a traffic congestion a your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs Turn signal and main beam lever Fig 36 Turn signal and main beam lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The parking light and h
26. Number of cylinders Displacement cm 103 4200 320 1750 2500 4 1968 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 perb Loe 4x4 Combi MG6 Combi DSG6 Combi DSG6 4x4 Top speed km h 208 211 206 204 205 209 203 201 Acceleration O 100 km h s 10 1 10 2 10 7 10 2 10 3 10 8 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1800 2000 1800 2000 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 125 4200 350 1750 2500 4 1968 Su perb MG6 4x4 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 Combi MG6 Combi DSG6 Combi MG6 4x4 Top speed km h Acceleration O 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg Technical data 223 Multi purpose vehicles AF Engine Maximum permissible gross weight kg MG6 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI 50478 DSG7 4x4 MG6 2088 2167 DSG6 2120 4x4 DSG6 2277 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 2 0 1 147 kW FSI 3 6 1 191 kW FSI MG5 2089 MG6 4x4 DSG6 21167 2210 4x4 MG6 2197 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b GreenLine 224 Technical data
27. Shifting up gears gt Press the selector lever forwards Fig 127 gt Pull the right rocker switch towards the multifunction steering wheel Shifting down gears gt Press the selector lever backwards Fig 127 gt Pull the left rocker switch towards the multifunction steering wheel Temporarily switching to manual shifting gt If the selector lever is in position D or S pull the left rocker switch or the right rocker switch towards the multifunction steering wheel gt Manual shifting switches off if the rocker switches or are not actuated for some time You can also switch off the temporary switch over to manual shift ing by pressing the right rocker switch for more than 1 second It is possible to switch to manual shifting when the car is stationary and when driving When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selected the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving If you operate the kickdown function the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed Note The kickdown function is also available when manually shifting gears Automatic gearbox 123 Selector lever lock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Automatic selector lever lock
28. The following speed restrictions apply to tyres Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed 180 km h 190 km h 200 km h 210 km h 240 km h 270 km h 300 km h The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall possibly only on the in side of wheel e g DOT 20 12 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of 2012 The following must be observed if only one temporary spare wheel is availa ble page 190 Wheels and Tyres 189 Unidirectional tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The so specified running direction must absolutely be complied with Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip low noise Wwear and tear and aquaplaning If in the event of a puncture it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre with out a dedicated running direction or the opposite running direction drive carefully as the optimum characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situa tion Spare wheel Fig 166 Boot Spare wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 166 Before removing the spare wheel the b
29. The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile If the PIN code was stored the telephone is automatically detected and connec ted with the hands free system the next time the ignition is switched on Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been establish ed Disconnecting the connection gt By removing the key from the ignition lock the connection is disconnected dur ing a telephone call gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the information display in the menu Bluetooth User Select user Disconnect On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ignition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio or navigation sys tem refer to the operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Note In the memory of the control unit up to three users can be stored whereby the hands free system can only communicate actively with one user If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone one of the users must be deleted a When connecting to the hands free system follow the instructions on your mo bile phone Operate the telephone via the information display If no telephone is connected with the hands free system after you select the Phone menu the message No paired phone found will
30. Vision Rear wiper Alternative park position of the rear window wiper Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 Each time after switching off the engine for the second time the wiper blade of the rear window wiper is tilted This prolongs the life of the wiper blade Activation deactivation gt Switch on the ignition gt Push the operating level into the position 6 Fig 47 on page 60 five times in succession within 5 seconds gt Switch off the ignition After switching on the ignition again the alternative park position of the rear window wiper is activated deactivated Lights and visibility 61 Headlight cleaning system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the first time and fifth time the low beam or main beam are switched on and the windscreen wiper lever was held in the position 5 Fig 47 on page 60 for about 1 second The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water pressure for cleaning the headlights You should remove stubborn dirt such as insect residues from the headlight len ses at regular intervals for example when refuelling The following guidelines must be observed page 170 Headlight lenses To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow shoul
31. and a distance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag The front passenger must maintain a dis tance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum dis tance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes nec essary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is de ployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi tion Passive Safety
32. damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident SA For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump tion i Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle You have opted for a SKODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities Please read this Owner s Manual carefully because the operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle If you have any questions about your vehicle please contact a SKODA Service Partner We wish you much pleasure with your SKODA and pleasant motoring at all times Your KODA AUTO a s hereinafter referred to as KODA The on board literature The on board literature for your vehicle consists of this Owner s Manual as well as a Service schedule and the Help on the road brochure Depending on the vehicle model and equipment other additional operating man uals and instructions may be provided e g an operating manual for the radio If one of the publications listed above is missing please contact a SKODA Service Partner The Owner s Manual These operating instructions describe all possible equipment variants without identifying them as
33. we recommend that reg ularly driving over short distances should be avoided a Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce the life of the diesel particle filter A SKODA specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries use only diesel fuel with high sulphur content Fuel reserve The indicator light H will come on if the fuel level is less than 9 litres The following is displayed in the information display Please refuel Range km Note The text in the information display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short distance Airbag system If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the airbag system The following is displayed in the information display Error Airbag The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off If a front side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system tester gt The indicator light lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switch ed on and then flashes for around 12 seconds The following is displayed in the information display Airbag belt tensioner deactivated If the airbag was switched off using the key operated switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side gt The indicator light amp comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt The switched off airbags ar
34. 202 Jump start ing a f the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or ona special vehicle transporter or trailer a The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km a To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a simi larly elastic material One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or jerky loadings There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage result ing at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road a Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes or to the detachable ball head of the towing device page 205 or page 206 Note a We recommend using a tow rope from KODA Original Accessories available from a SKODA Service Partner a Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in a When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which re late t
35. 38 Heated rear seats 39 Rear window wiper 40 Fan air conditioning system relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation 41 Not assigned 42 Light switch Power consumer On some vehicles the battery cover must be removed before removing the cover lt lt e for the fuse box page 184 Control unit for trailer detection Control unit for trailer detection Control unit for trailer detection gt The cover for the fuse box is removed by pushing the circlips A Fig 185 up wards as far as the stop The symbol is displayed behind the clip Now remove the cover Switch for seat heating gt Once the fuse has been removed place the cover on the fuse box and push the Telephone preinstallation circlips A back as far as the stop The symbol is displayed behind the clip The Preparation for the aftermarket radio cover is locked into position Not assigned Fuse assignment in the engine compartment version A Power consumer Fl Front right main headlight right tail light F2 Valves for ABS F3 4 Not assigned F5 Horn F6 12 Not assigned F13 Control unit for automatic gearbox F14 Not assigned F15 Coolant pump F16 Not assigned Fuses in the engine compartment F17 Instrument cluster windscreen wiper lever and turn signal lever F18 Audio amplifier sound system F19 Radio F20 22 Not assigned Fig 185 F23 Engine control unit Cover for the
36. 94 Using the system Changing the air flow direction gt The horizontal as well as the vertical direction of the air flow is set with the moveable handle in the middle of the relevant air outlet vents The air outlet vents 2 3 Fig 106 and 5 Fig 107 can be closed and opened indi vidually Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions Introductory information The cooling system only operates if the button AQ 1 Fig 108 on page 95 is pressed and the following conditions are met gt engine running gt outside temperature above approx 2 C gt blower switch switched on positions 1 to 4 Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about 5 C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on Lengthy and uneven distribu tion of the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature for ex ample when getting out of the vehicle can result in chills in sensitive persons cial Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a SKODA specialist garage once every year Using the system PASSENGER AIR BAG eee Fig 108 The air conditioning system Control elements Setting temperature gt Turn the control dial A Fig 108 to the right to increase the temperature gt Turn the control dial A to the left to decrease the temperature
37. Cepaciies tires 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDICR S 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR l CAUTION a Other coolant additives that do not comply with the correct specifications can above all significantly reduce the anticorrosion effect Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can conse quently result in major engine damage Note On vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater auxiliary heating and ventila tion the coolant capacity is approx 1 larger Checking the coolant level Fignias Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 180 General Maintenance The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet page 177 gt Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle Fig 159 The cool ant level when the engine is cold must lie between the B MIN and A MAX markings The level may also rise slightly above the A MAX marking when the engine is warm If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the indicator light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 21 Coolant tem perature coolant level We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first
38. D on the multifunction steering wheel select the menu item Warning against excessive speeds gt Pressing the button B on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel deletes the speed limit gt Pressing the button B on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel again activates change mode for the speed limit If the set speed limit is exceeded an audible signal will sound as a warning At the same time the message Warning against excessive speeds appears on the display with the set limit value The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Main menu 16 Settings iG Door boot lid and bonnet warning 18 Auto Check Control 18 The information display provides you with information on the current operating state of your vehicle The information system also provides you with data relating to the radio mobile phone multifunction display navigation system the unit con nected to the MDI port and the automatic gearbox page 121 E WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle l CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display e g when cleaning to prevent any possible damage Instruments and In
39. Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by discon necting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge SA For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations i Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years 184 General Maintenance Battery cover Fig 162 Engine compartment Polyester cover of the vehicle battery plastic cover of the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester cover 1 Fig 162 in a plastic cover 2 Fig 162 or in the left side of the boot Fig 102 on page 90 Battery in the engine compartment gt Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 1 or press the interlock on the side of the battery cover in the
40. Heckwischer Lane ch flash Switch on off the convenience flashing function Travel mode Switch on off the travel model function Factory seine Restore the factory setting for the lighting Time The time time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the changeover between sum mer winter time can be set here Winter tyres Here you can set the speed at which an audible signal should sound This func tion is for example used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle When exceeding the speed the following is shown on the information display Winter tyres max speed km h Units of measurement The units for the temperature consumption and distance driven can be set here Assistants The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here Second speed The display of the second speed in mph or in km h can be switched on here Service Here you can have the remaining kilometres and days until the next service inter val displayed and reset the Service Interval Display Factory Setting After selecting the menu Factory setting the factory setting of the information display is restored Instruments and Indicator Lights 17 Door boot lid and bonnet warning First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 If at least one door is open or the boot or bonnet is open the information display
41. Single trip memory memory 1 The single trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ig nition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the cal culation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1 999 kilometres driven and on vehi cles which are fitted with an information display up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9 999 kilometres driven The memory is deleted when ei ther of these limits is reached and the calculation starts all over again Unlike the single trip memory the total trip memory is not deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours i Note All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is dis connected Operation Fig 6 Multifunction display Control elements on the windscreen wiper lev er control elements on the multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 12 The rocker switch A Fig 6 and the button B are located on the windscreen wiper lever Switching over and resetting is performed with the adjustment wheel D on the
42. Taking outthelamp 0 TESS The lamp is fitted with magnets Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp for example on the vehicle body after removing it m Taking out the lamp g CAUTION a Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows D Fig 42 on page 57 and swivel it We recommend having the faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a KODA e a a Or nelatow E specialist garage If the lamp is not correctly opened it can be damaged P Lights and visibility 57 SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the faulty rechargeable batteries in accordance with environmental regulations i Note a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batteries a The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as the original rechargeable batteries If other types of rechargeable batteries are used the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the lamp Windscreen and rear window heater Fig 43 Switch for windscreen heater switch for rear window heater Windscreen heater gt The windscreen heater is switched on or off by pressing the switch Fig 43 A the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out Rear window heater gt The rear window heater is switched on or off by pressing the switch Fig 43 B the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out The windscreen and rear window heater only operates w
43. The locked doors make it more diffi cult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard a A f Note a Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight a To avoid the car being locked inadvertently once in the car the lock button of the remote control must not be pressed before the key is inserted into the ig nition lock Should this happen press the unlock button 3 of the remote control a The automatic raising of the small boot lid can be impaired at temperatures be low 4 C Unlocking andlocking 31 Synchronisation If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no lon ger synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the radio operated key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery on the remote control was replaced This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows gt press any button on the remote control key gt pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 mi nute Introductory information The KESSY system Keyless Entry Start Exit System enables a comfort unlocking and locking of the vehicle and a start up without actively using the remote con trol key The KESSY system is integrated in the central locking syste
44. With the ignition on the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever out of this posi tion The indicator light page 26 Selector lever lock starting KESSY system illuminates in the instrument cluster as a reminder for the driver when the se lector lever is in the positions P and N The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N e g from R to D This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck The selec tor lever lock will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed of less than 5 km hour The lock is switched off automatically into position N when the car is travelling at a higher speed Shiftlock button The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently The selector lever lock is cancelled when the Shiftlock button is pressed Ignition key withdrawal lock After the ignition is switched off the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the se lector lever is in the position P If the ignition key is withdrawn the selector lever is blocked in position P Kickdown function First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 The kickdown func
45. a lifting jack a Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent pos sible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc a Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack danger of suffering injury a Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose CAUTION a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the anti theft wheel bolt is fastened too tightly it can cause damage to the anti theft wheel bolt and adapter Note The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Serv ice Partner a The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preliminary work First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 196 The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel gt In the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic The place you choose should be level gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stan
46. activates at the set time it is necessary to pre set a time again If the pre set menu is closed by selecting the menu item Back or if no changes are made on the display for more than 10 seconds the set values are stored but the pre set time is not activated An indicator light on the button 8 Fig 110 on page 101 is illuminated when the system is running The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or can be deactivated earlier by pressing the button to directly switch on off the auxiliary heating 3 or by using the radio remote control Radio remote control A B5L 0416 Fig 111 Auxiliary heating Radio remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 100 gt For switching on press the button Fig 111 gt For switching off press the button OFF The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The air conditioning system 101 If the battery is properly charged the effective range is up to 600 m To switch on off the auxiliary heating hold the radio remote control vertically with the an tenna A Fig 111 facing upwards The antenna must not be covered with the fin gers or the palm of the hand during this process Obstacles between the radio re mote control and the vehicle bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly re
47. adaptive headlights page 51 Exhaust inspection system If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the exhaust inspection system The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Instruments and Indicator Lights 23 Glow plug system vo diesel engine The indicator light 07 comes on after the ignition has been switched on The en gine can be started immediately after the pre glow indicator light goes out There is a fault in the glow plug system if the indicator light 0 does not come on at all or lights up continuously If the indicator light oo begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EPC EPC fault light petrol engine If the indicator light EPC lights up there is a fault in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Diesel particulate filter diesel engine The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a reg ular basis If the indicator light lights up soot has accumulated in the diesel particulate filter To clean the diesel particle filter the vehicle should be driven at an even speed of at le
48. adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel The numbers 0 9 symbol and the functions Delete Call Save Back can be selected Messages The menu Messages comprises a list of received text messages After calling a message the following functions appear Show Read the system reads out the selected message through the vehicle s speak ers Send time Callback Copy copies the incoming message to the SIM card Delete Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected in the menu Bluetooth User the overview of the stored users Connect Disconnect Rename Delete New user Search for users in the reception range a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the hands free system for other devices Communication 133 Media player Active device Paired devices Connect Rename Delete Authorisation Search search for available media players a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the hands free system for media play ers in the vicinity Extras Modem overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the internet Active device Paired devices Phone name the possibility to change the name of the hands free system pre set SKODA UHV Settings The following menu items can be selected in the menu Settings Phone book Update scan the telephone book Select memory SIM amp phone SIM card Mobile phone Ini
49. adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehi cle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the air bag system is deployed a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fittings a It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat Further information page 154 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat ia Note We recommend that you use child seats from SKODA Original Accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODA vehicles They fulfil the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Fig 147 Sticker on the B column on the front passenger side First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 154 For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible The following guidelines must be observed when using a child safety seat
50. and foremost an indication of a leak in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a SKODA spe cialist garage immediately CAUTION If a fault causes the engine to overheat we recommend visiting a KODA Service Partner immediately otherwise serious engine damage may occur Replenishing the coolant First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 gt Switch off the engine gt Allow the engine to cool gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir Fig 159 on page 180 and unscrew the cap carefully gt Replenish the coolant gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency In this case just use water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and the coolant additive restored by a SKODA specialist garage as soon as possi ble Only use new coolant to top up the system Do not fill the coolant above the mark A max Fig 159 on page 180 Excess coolant heats up and then is forced out of the cooling system through the pres sure relief valve in the cap EJ warnine a The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health Avoid contact with the coolant Coolant vapours are also harmful to health Therefore always safely store the coolant additive in its original container out of the reach of children risk
51. and remove the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Then pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A gt No oil must be refilled Oil level within range gt Oil can be refilled It is possible that the oil level may then be within range A after doing this Oil level within range gt Oil must be refilled It is sufficient once this is done to keep the oil level within range B It is normal for the engine to consume oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 1 1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals preferably every time after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motor way trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high moun tain pass The indicator light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low page 22 Engine oil level In this case check the oil level with the dip stick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly CAUTION The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range A Fig
52. and the belts must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and backrests they must be ready to use a The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob jects in the boot can slide forwards if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged It is only then that the three point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function a Ensure that the cross rod is inserted into the mounts C Fig 78 on page 80 or Fig 79 on page 80 in the front position Using the net partition behind the rear seats Fig 78 Pull out the net partition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 79 Pulling out gt Pull the net partition by the bracket A Fig 78 out of the housing B in direc tion of the holders c gt Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards gt In the same way insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle Folding gt First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C Fig 78 gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged If you wish to use the entire boot the foldable boot cover can be re moved Fig 69 on page 76 80 Using the system Using th
53. anti clockwise up to the stop and remove it from the housing gt Push in the bulb turn in an anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove gt Insert a new bulb into the holder push in and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop gt Insert the holder with the new bulb into the housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop Licence plate light Fig 192 Rear bumper Licence plate light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 gt Unscrew the glass cover of the light Fig 192 gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one gt Replace the glass cover and push in until the stop Make sure that you install the glass cover in the correct position gt Screw the glass cover of the light into place TOMISE Boot lid Licence plate light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 gt Insert a flat screwdriver into the opening in the area of the arrow Fig 193 and carefully press towards the centre of the lamp by doing so the lamp jumps out slightly gt Remove the lamp gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one gt Replace the glass cover and push in until the stop Make sure that you install the glass cover in the correct position Fuses and light bulbs 215 Technical data Introductory information The details given in the vehicle
54. been deployed it is then necessary to replace the entire system Note a Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an indi cation of a fire in the vehicle a When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is impor tant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA Service Partners are fa miliar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed infor mation Seat belts 147 Introductory information The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically The airbag indicator light 2 comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on page 25 The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed to offer additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system according to vehicle equipment consists of gt an electronic control unit gt Front airbags for the driver and front seat passenger page 149 gt a driver s knee airbag page 150 gt side airbags page 151 gt head airbags page 152 gt an airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster page 25 gt a key switch for the front seat passenger airbag page 153 gt an indicator light in the middle of the dash panel to indicate the front seat pas senger airbag is switched off page 153 A fault in the airbag system exists if gt the indicator light 2 does not illuminate when the ignition is switched
55. can be hazardous to heath when the temperature inside the vehicle is high CAUTION Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible Stains on the material leather panels and textiles a Cleaners containing solvents can damage the material being cleaned a Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage a f washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner en sure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door panel joints risk of freezing Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts risk of damaging the surface of paintwork a Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the window aerial These may get damaged With regard to the antenna they may in terfere with the radio or navigation system a Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial Do not attach scents and air fresheners to the dashboard risk of damage to the dashboard a To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners or steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed a Do not clean
56. care for the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Superb anglicky 11 2012 S74 5610 07 20 3T0 O12 003 LT
57. carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing If there is sufficient bright sunlight the solar cells on the sliding tilting roof deliv er power for the fresh air blower Further information page 97 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system The operation of the sliding tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a normal sliding tilting roof 44 Using the system Fig 26 Point for positioning screwdriver opening for positioning the key The sliding tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if the system is faulty The emergency operation of the sliding roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 page 87 Glasses storage box gt Open the glasses storage box gt Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the po sitions shown by the arrows 1 Fig 26 gt Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and turning the screwdriver gt Insert an Allen key SW 4 up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the sliding tilting roof gt Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage ee Note It is necessary after each emergency operation using the Allen key to move the Sliding tilting roof into the basic position This is why the rotary switch must be set
58. clean the covers Natural leather First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 167 Depending on the amount of wear and tear the leather should be cleaned ona regular basis Normal cleaning Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen cloth 172 General Maintenance Severe soiling Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water gets into the stitching of the seams Dry off the leather with a soft dry cloth Removing stains Remove fresh water based stains e g coffee tea juices blood with an absorb ent cloth or household cleaning paper A specific cleaning agent is required for dried on stains Remove fresh grease based stains e g butter mayonnaise chocolate etc with an absorbent cloth household cleaning paper or use a Suitable cleaner if the Stain has not yet penetrated into the surface Use a grease solvent for grease stains which have dried in Remove specific stains e g ball point pens marker pen nail varnish dispersion paint shoe polish etc with a special stain remover suitable for leather Leather care Treat the leather roughly every six months with a suitable leather care product Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product Dry off the leather with a soft dry cloth CAUTION a Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from blea
59. cover down Fig 100 A Opening from the boot gt Push the unlock button 1 Fig 100 B down and fold the cover including the armrest forwards Left rear door Stowage com Closing partment for an umbrella gt Fold the cover and armrest upwards to the stop the lid must click into place Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button 1 is not visible from the boot FJ warnine The through loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured removable through loading bag page 90 a The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left door Fig 99 i Note An umbrella can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories a Seats and Stowage 89 Fig 101 Securing the through loading vd r d vd A FaN B3T 0352 The removable through loading bag is solely used for transporting skis Loading gt Open the boot lid gt Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards page 89 Seat backrest with through loading channel gt Place the empty removable through loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot gt Push the skis into the removable through loading bag from the boot H gt Close the through loading bag Securing gt Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bi
60. direction of the arrow 2 Fig 162 fold the cover up and remove gt The battery cover is installed in reverse order Battery in the boot gt Open the compartment with the symbol amp by turning the locks e g with a coin or flat screwdriver in the direction of the arrow Fig 102 on page 90 When working on the battery the edge of the polyester battery cover 1 Fig 162 is inserted between the battery and the side wall of the battery cov er Checking the battery electrolyte level Fig 163 Vehicle battery Electrolyte level indicator j ih Ww q i f Ww a H a as w Pose i wW Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 We recommend you have the electrolyte level checked by a SKODA specialist ga rage from time to time especially in the following cases gt High outside temperatures gt Long daily drives gt After each charge page 185 On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator the so called magic eye Fig 163 the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced Note The batte
61. door pillar Fig 145 B Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car is cushioned by the inflated head airbag The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area The head airbag also offers additional protec tion in the case of an offset impact by covering the middle door pillar EI WARNING There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing Additionally clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of cloth ing 152 Safety HE WARNING Continued The airbag control unit operates with sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels e g additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a SKODA specialist garage There must no other persons e g children or animals between the passen ger and the deployment area of the head airbag In addition none of the occu pants should lean their head out of the window when driving or e
62. easier to move the selector lever out of position P If the selector lever position N is accidentally selected while driving it is first nec essary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for the idling speed of the engine to be reached before the selector lever can be engaged in the drive position Starting off and driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Starting off gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal gt Press the Shiftlock button button in the selector lever handle move the selec tor lever into the desired position page 122 and then release the Shiftlock button gt Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted a slight engagement nudge can be felt gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate Stop gt The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time such as at a cross roads It is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary using the foot brake The engine can however be allowed just to idle Parking gt Depress the brake pedal gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever move the selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button 1 Applies to AG 122 Using the system Selector lever positions 10 14 Consumption k 5 3 1 100km Fig 126 Selector lever information display Selector lever positions First r
63. engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the engine compart ment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids It is essential to ob serve safety notes page 176 Engine compartment Instruments and Indicator Lights 19 Handbrake The indicator light comes on if the handbrake is applied An audible warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km h The following is displayed in the information display Release parking brake Brake system The indicator light illuminates if the brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the ABS The following is displayed in the information display Brake fluid Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 181 ff E WARNING f you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level page 176 Engine compartment a f the indicator light is displayed simultaneously with indicator light page 23 Antilock brake system ABS do not continue your jour ney Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage A fault to the brakin
64. for positioning the key of the sensor 1 Fig 13 on page 32 The panoramic sliding roof can be closed or opened manually if the system is faul Closing ty The emergency operation of the panoramic sliding roof is located underneath gt Hold down the lock button 8 on the remote control key or when using the the glasses storage box 1 page 87 Glasses storage box KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor 1 Fig 13 on page 32 gt Open the glasses storage box gt Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the po sitions shown by the arrows 1 Fig 29 gt Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and Tilting roof turning the screwdriver gt Press and hold the unlock button 8 on the remote control key gt Insert an Allen key SW 4 up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the panoramic sliding roof gt Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards After releasing the button or lifting your finger off the sensor 1 when using the KESSY system the closing process is immediately interrupted When closing or tilting the panoramic sliding roof the sun screen is closed or opened at the same time i Note Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage The force limiter also operates for convenience closing aa Note The panoramic sliding roof can only be
65. fuse box in the en PA Oats buscontolunit gine compartment F25 26 Not assigned F27 Fuel dosage valve F28 Engine control unit F29 Main relay F30 Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit Ser Eol F31 Windscreen wipers First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn F32 37 Not assigned ings H on page 207 F38 _ Radiator fan valves F39 Clutch brake pad sensor Fuses and light bulbs 209 Power consumer Power consumer Lambda probe AKF valve Front right main headlight right tail light Horn Lambda probe Ignition Audio amplifier sound system Windscreen wipers Not assigned Front left main headlight left tail light Pump for ABS Power supply for terminal 15 ignition on Valve for fuel dosing Coolant pump Lambda probe Clutch pedal switch Relay valves high pressure pump Not assigned Radiator fan Pump for ABS Left main headlight Control unit for glow plug system Power supply relay terminal X Accessories Not assigned a In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off Windscreen heater Accessories Fuse assignment in the engine compartment version B Power consumer Power supply relay terminal X F1 Not assigned 4
66. gt The speed will increase continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the RES position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed gt The stored speed can be reduced by pressing the rocker button B Fig 124 on page 117 into the position SET gt The speed will decrease continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory gt If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than 30 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased The speed must then be stored again by pressing the rocker button B in the position SET after increasing the speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km h The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which temporarily deactivates the system Starting off and Driving 117 Switching off the cruise control system temporarily First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 The cruise control system is temporarily switched off by pressing the switch A Fig 124 on page 117 into the spring tensioned position CANCEL or by de pressing the brake or clutch pedal The set speed remains stored in the memory Briefly press the rocker button B into the position RES to resume the stored speed after the clutch or brake p
67. hooks 91 Cockpit 12 volt power socket 84 Ashtray 83 Cigarette lighter 84 General view 7 226 Index Light 54 Storage compartments 85 Compartments CH Computer see Multifunction display 12 Coolant Checking 180 Replenishing 180 Temperature gauge 9 Correct seated position ST Counter for distance driven 10 Cruise control system CCS 116 Cup holder front 8B rear BB D Daylight driving light 49 De icing the windscreen and rear window 58 Deactivating an airbag 152 Deactivating an airbag 152 Delayed locking of the boot lid see Boot lid 37 Diesel refer to Fuel 176 Diesel fuel Operation in winter 176 Diesel particulate filter 24 Digital clock 1 Dipstick 178 Display Coolant temperature 9 Service interval 10 Distance driven 10 Door Child safety lock 28 Indicator light for an open door 20 Door locking Emergency locking 35 Doors Emergency locking 35 Driving Abroad 162 Driving through water on the street 163 Emissions 216 Fuel consumption 216 DVD preinstallation 139 E Economical and environmentally friendly driving 159 EDL 111 Electrical power windows Button in the driver s door 40 Electric boot lid Adjusting the lid top position 38 Malfunctions 38 Operation 38 Electric power windows Central locking system 42 Electric sliding tilting roof 43 Elec
68. incoming or outgoing call voice control dialogue occurs during the updating procedure After the telephone event has ended the updating starts anew GSM Il The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 200 tel ephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not complete 128 Using the system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile GSM Ill The internal phonebook provides 2 000 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 5 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 000 tel ephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the telephone book of the mobile phone contains more than 2 000 contacts the system announces during the download Phone book not fully loaded Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II hands free system includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the adapter radio or the navigation system The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following functions gt Phone Phonebook page 128 gt Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel page 127 gt Managing telephone calls via the adap
69. is confirmed by a brief audible signal The parking aid is deactivated by pressing the button Pa or at a speed of more than 10 km h the symbol Pu in the button is no longer illuminated FJ WARNING The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they are not recognised by the parking aid sensors Before reversing or parking check that there is no small obstacle such as a rock thin post trailer drawbar etc in front of or behind the vehicle Such ob stacles may not be recognised by the parking aid sensors a Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of cloth ing cannot reflect the signals from the parking aid Thus these objects or peo ple who wear such clothing are not recognised by the parking aid sensors a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the parking aid Under unfavourable conditions objects or people may not be recognised a f a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault The fault is confirmed additionally when the symbol P flashes in the button Pa Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage a The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable t
70. multifunction steering wheel Select memory gt Press the button B Fig 6 or D Selecting functions using the windscreen wiper lever gt Briefly press the rocker switch A Fig 6 up or down This opens the individual functions of the multifunction display one after the other Selecting functions using the multifunction steering wheel gt Press the button C Fig 6 to open the menu of the multifunction display gt Turn the adjustment wheel D upwards or downwards This opens the individu al functions of the multifunction display one after the other Reseting gt Select the desired memory gt Press and hold the button B Fig 6 or D for a short while The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the but ton B or D gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven gt Average speed gt Driving time Multifunction display details First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 12 Outside temperature The current outside temperature is shown in the display If the outside temperature drops below 4 C a snow flake symbol warning sig nal for ice on the road appears before the temperature indicator and an audible signal will sound After pressing the rocker switch A Fig 6 on page 13 at the windscreen wiper lever or the button C at the multifunction steering wheel the function shown last is indicated Instruments a
71. of engine damage Note a Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle a We recommend that you use oils from SKODA Original Accessories Technical data 219 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 92 5000 200 1500 4000 4 1390 Performances Superb MG6 Combi MG6 Top speed km h 201 204 199 202 Acceleration O to 100 km h s 10 5 10 62 10 6 10 72 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1500 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 730 740 740 750 a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 112 4300 6200 250 1500 4200 4 1798 Performances Superb MG6 Superb AG6 Superb MG6 4x4 Combi MG6 Combi AG6 Top speed km h 216 212 213 214 210 211 Acceleration O 100 km h s 8 9 9 4 9 0 9 0 9 5 9 1 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 1700 16002 1800 1500 1700 16002 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 220 Technical data 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI engine 118 4500 6200 250 1500 4500 4 1798 Performances Superb
72. of poisoning a If any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible a You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently swallowed coolant CAUTION Do not continue your journey if it is not possible to top up the coolant under the prevailing conditions Contact a SKODA Service Partner to avoid the risk of serious engine Radiator fan First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 176 The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the coolant temperature After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to op erate for approx 10 minutes Checking the brake fluid Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet page 177 gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 160 The level must be be tween the MIN and MAX markings When driving a slight drop in the fluid level is caused by the wear and tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads and is therefore perfectly normal There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid lev el drops significantly within a s
73. of the arrow Fig 130 up to the stop into the mount Then press the adapter slightly downwards until it locks securely into position gt Insert the mobile phone into the adapter A as specified in the instructions from the manufacturer of the adapter Removing the adapter and mobile phone gt Simultaneously press the locks on the mount Fig 130 and remove the adapter with the mobile phone CAUTION Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interrup tion of the connection When removing the mobile phone the connection to the factory fitted antenna is interrupted which reduces the quality of the transmit ting and receiving signal The charging of the mobile phone battery is also inter rupted 130 Using the system Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter Fig 131 Principle sketch Adapter with one button adapter with two but tons Function overview of the PTT push to talk button on the adapt er Fig 131 gt Switch on off voice control gt Accept end a call On some adapters include the button S05 A Fig 131 in addition to the button 4 After pressing this button for 2 seconds the number 112 Emergency call is dialled fi Note On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system the buttons and do not work Operate the telephone via the information display The following menu items can be selected in the menu Phone Phon
74. of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear gt To reinstall first of all push the boot cover into the holders 2 and then hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest EJ warnine No objects should be placed on the boot cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something Seats and Stowage 75 CAUTION Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not dam aged as a result of objects placed in this area i Note Opening the boot lid also lifts up the boot cover Foldable boot cover Combi Fig 69 Boot foldable boot cover removing foldable boot cover First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 Pulling out gt Pull the foldable boot cover as far as the stop into the secured position 2 Fig 69 Folding gt Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 69 and the cover automatically rolls up into position 1 The cover is fully rolled up by pressing once again Removing gt The fully folded boot cover can be removed to transport bulky goods by press ing on the side of the cross rod in the direction of the arrow 4 Fig 69 and taking it out by moving it in the direction of the arrow 5 76 Using the system EI WARNING No objects should be placed on the foldable b
75. of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users a Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 176 Engine compartment a Bulbs H7 and H3 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb a Gas discharge bulbs xenon bulbs operate with a high voltage professional knowledge is required danger to life CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth nap kin or similar a When removing and installing the tail light make sure that the paintwork of the vehicle and the tail light are not damaged i Note a This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other light bulbs should be changed by a SKODA specialist garage a We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs be always carried in the vehi cle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories a We recommend that the headlight settings are checked by a KODA specialist garage after replacing a bulb in the main or low beam a Gas discharge bulbs and LED diodes are replaced by a KODA specialist garage Headlights
76. on gt the indicator light 2 does not go out 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on gt the indicator light 2t goes out and comes on again after the ignition is switched on gt the indicator light 2 comes on or flashes when driving gt the indicator light in the middle of the dash panel for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag flashes 148 Safety EI warnine a The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is fas tened TO ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size page 141 Correct seated position a If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident a If there is a fault have the airbag system checked immediately by a KODA specialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried ou
77. on if it has achieved a coolant temperature of approx 50 C a At low outside temperatures this can result in a formation of water vapour in the area of the engine compartment This is quite normal and is not an operating problem a After switching off the auxiliary heating the coolant pump runs for a short peri od a The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on if the ve hicle battery indicates a low loading state page 186 Automatic load deactiva tion a The auxiliary heating parking heating does not switch on if the following was shown in the information display or before switching off the ignition Please re fuel a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice snow or leaves in order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxili ary heating you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open position It is recommended to put the air flow in the position 3 or 5 Direct switching on off Fig 110 Button for direct switching on off of the auxiliary heating aux iliary heating and ventilation on the operating part of the air con ditioning system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 100 The auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation c
78. only increase fuel con sumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Avoid unnecessary ballast Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption It is worth checking the boot to avoid transporting any unnecessary ballast It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the ve hicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h your vehicle that is fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load will use use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag Saving electricity When the engine is running the alternator generates and supplies electrical pow er If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator We therefore recommend switching off electrical components if these are no longer required Environmental compatibility Environmental protection has played a major role in the design selection of mate rials and manufacture of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disa
79. outer part of the tail light gt Open the boot lid gt Remove the plug Fig 189 A and unscrew the tail light with a torx wrench page 196 Vehicle tool kit gt Carefully remove the light Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the bodywork gt To re install the tail light first of all guide it with the support A Fig 190 to wards the front onto a bolt on the bodywork gt Carefully press the tail light onto the bodywork gt Screw the tail light into place and push in the plugs Fig 189 gt Changing bulbs in the outer part of the tail light gt To replace the bulb turn the bulb holder anti clockwise up to the stop and re move it from the housing gt Replace the bulb insert the holder with the bulb into the housing and turnina clockwise direction to the the stop Removing and installing the inner part of the tail light gt Open the boot lid gt Remove the tail light cover on the inner side of the boot lid Fig 189 B gt Press the lug Fig 189 B and remove the lamp holder from the tail light housing gt To re install insert the lamp holder into the tail light housing gt Press the lug until it clicks into place gt Insert the tail light cover on the inner side of the boot lid Changing bulbs in the inner part of the tail light gt Remove the faulty bulb 4 Fig 190 from the holder and insert a new bulb
80. page 53 Note If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnected the yellow indica tor light comes on after switching on the ignition The indicator light must go out after driving a short distance If the yellow indicator light does not go out after starting the engine again and a short drive it is necessary to visit a SKODA specialist garage Engine oil level The indicator light lights up oil quantity too low The following is displayed in the information display Check oil level Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 178 22 Using the system The indicator light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds If no engine oil has been replenished the indicator light will come on again after driving about 100 km The indicator light flashes engine oil level sensor faulty The following is displayed in the information display Oil sensor Workshop If the engine oil level sensor is faulty the indicator light flashes several times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Electronic Stability Control ESC amp The indicator light flashes amp to show that the ESC is cur
81. parking was exceeded Park Assist currently not available The Park Assist cannot be switched on because a fault exists on the vehicle Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage Park Assist ended System currently not available The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage Park Assist faulty Workshop The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists on the park assist Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage Steering interv active Monitor area around veh The Park Assist is active and takes over the steering movements Observe the Surrounding area and carefully reverse while operating the pedals 116 Using the system Please take over steering Finish parking manually Assume control of the steering Complete the parking procedure without using the park assist system Speed too high Please take over steering The parking procedure was ended because the speed was exceeded Park Assist ASR intervention The intervention of the TCS while searching for a suitable parking place ASR intervention Please take over steering The parking procedure is terminated by the intervention of the TCS Park Assist Stationary time not sufficient The stationary time of the vehicle was less than 1 second Park Assist Speed too low After the ignition is switched on the vehicle must exceed the speed of 10 km h at least o
82. pump the lever 2 downwards Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt To adjust the angle of the backrest relieve any pressure from the seat backrest do not lean on it and turn the handwheel 3 Fig 53 Adjusting lumbar support gt Turn the lever 4 Fig 53 until the most comfortable curvature of the lumbar support is achieved Fig 54 Controls for the electric seat adjustment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 66 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Press the switch B Fig 54 forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow 1 Set the height of the seat cushion gt Press the switch B Fig 54 upwards or downwards Adjust the angle of the seat cushion gt Press the switch B Fig 54 in the direction of the arrow 2 or 3 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Press the switch C Fig 54 in the direction of the desired setting Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support gt Press the switch A Fig 54 forwards or backwards Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support gt Press the switch A Fig 54 upwards or downwards The adjusted driver s seat position can be set in the memory of the seat page 68 or the remote control key page 68 it Note If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment once again press the switch in the appropriate direct
83. read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 105 The steering must be unlocked to switch on the ignition gt Briefly press the starter button Fig 114 on page 106 and the ignition is switch ed on If the ignition is switched on and the driver s door is opened the following mes sage is shown in the information display Switch off ignition Switching off the ignition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 105 gt Briefly press the starter button Fig 114 on page 106 and the ignition is switch ed off The ignition can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km h On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox the clutch pedal must not be depressed after switching off the ignition otherwise the system would try to start On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox the selector lever must be in the position P or N and the brake pedal must not be depressed Emergency ignition shutoff system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 105 In an emergency it is possible to switch off the ignition even at speeds greater than 2 km h by using the emergency ignition shutoff system gt Press the starter button Fig 114 on page 106 for longer than 1 second or twice within 1 second Starting engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 105 Maintain th
84. regularly while you are driving Range The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display It indicates the dis tance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and the same style of driving The display is shown in steps of 10 km After lighting up of the indicator light i the display is shown in steps of 5 km The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate the range The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 2 On some models in certain countries km ltr is displayed when the vehicle is stationary 14 Using the system If the memory is set to zero after disconnecting the battery the fuel consump tion of 10 Itr 100 km is calculated for the range afterwards the value is adapted accordingly to the style of driving Distance travelled The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the dis play page 12 If you wish to measure the distance driven from a particular time you must set the memory to Zero at this point in time by pressing the button Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km or 9 999 km on vehicles with an information display The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Average spee
85. s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual Please refer to the official vehicle registration documents or consult a SKODA Service Partner to determine which engine your vehicle is equipped with The listed performance values were determined without performance reducing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome This number is al so located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code Engine number The engine number is stamped into the engine block Data on the vehicle data sticker and the type plate OOOO OOOO KKXK lwo w m 2 YAY O O XK XK NX c A 1D0 SSL SAG IKS SFA IAC SFA 443 BLI JIL GIO BGU 6YO KH GRE 770 SYF BGA GKO 4Fi B37 7MG QNO As P0 7KO 92F GWD 740 30N os eo oe 7AA GO2 LOZ 7P4 FOA 354 QUA SON OAK ANAL tik Fig 194 Vehicle data sticker type plate 216 Technical data Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 194 is located on the floor of the boot and is also stated in the service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data Vehicle identification number VIN Vehicle type Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output engine code Partial vehicle description Operating weight in kg
86. side If the button is pressed at a speed greater than 30 km h and less than 50 km h the message indicating that the speed for detecting the space has been excee ded will be shown on the display of the instrument cluster If the speed drops be low 30 km h the condition of the park assist system is automatically displayed in the display of the instrument cluster When exceeding a speed of 50 km h it is necessary to activate the display again by pressing the button Fig 121 Parking with the help of the park assist system and completing the parking procedure B3T 0517 Fig 122 Information display Parking space detected including the informa tion to continue driving A and to engage reverse gear hj 4 J t 8 at f LU hH Te pathy h aH aa F oe CELAJ i mo u bi B3T 0518 Fig 123 Information display Information to engage the forward gear c or the reverse gear D First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 The time limit for the parking procedure with the help of the park assist system is 180 seconds gt If the park assist system has recognised a suitable parking space it is shown in the information display Fig 122 A gt Continue driving forwards until the display Fig 122 B appears gt Stop the vehicle for at least 1 second gt Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever into the position R
87. speed and the use of the windscreen wiper The AHL system operates in the following modes Out of town mode The out of town mode is a basic mode The dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam The mode is active if none of the following modes are active Rain mode In the rain mode the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wid er and the width of illumination is shorter so that during bad weather rain the dazzling of the oncoming drivers can be reduced The mode is activated at speeds of 15 70 km h and if the windscreen wipers continuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes The mode is deactivated when dropping below or ex ceeding the set speed limit or if the windscreen wipers have been switched off for a period of time longer than 8 minutes 1 Itis valid for vehicles which are designed for driving on the left City mode In the city mode the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wid er and the width of illumination is shorter The aim is to illuminate also the adja cent footpaths crossings pedestrian crossings etc The mode is active at speeds of 15 50 km h Motorway mode In the motorway mode the dispersion of the cone of light is adapted so that it also illuminates the left or right lane of the motorway so that the driver can re act in time to an obstacle or any other danger The mode is activ
88. the brakes for the pur pose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy CAUTION a When driving through bodies of water parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox chassis or electrics can be severely damaged a Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle a Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or im possible to drive through the body of water a Do not drive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Any vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water Note After driving through a body of water we recommend that the vehicle is checked by a SKODA specialist garage Driving and the Environment 163 Technical requirements If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with a towing device or is fitted with a towing device from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer On vehicles with a towing device the ball rod is detachable and is stowed togeth er with separate operating instructions in the spare wheel well or in the compart ment for the spare wheel within the boot page 196 Vehicle tool kit Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection be tween
89. the cooling efficiency of the coolant There is then a risk of the engine overheating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads page 21 Coolant temperature coolant level Fuel gauge First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The fuel gauge 6 Fig 2 on page 8 only operates when the ignition is switched on The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres The indicator light in the instru ment cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve mark ingi page 24 CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty An irregular supply of fuel can lead to irregular engine running Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter Instruments and Indicator Lights 9 Note After filling up it can occur that during dynamic driving e g numerous curves braking driving downhill and climbing a steep hill the fuel gauge indicates ap prox a fraction less When stopping or during less dynamic driving the fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again This is not a fault Counter for distance driven First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Daily trip counter trip The trip counter shows the distance driven since the time the counter was last reset To reset the display of the daily trip counter press button 7 Fig 2 on page 8 for longer Odometer The odometer ind
90. the environment Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to lower fuel consumption minimises operating noise levels protects the environment and contributes to a longer life and reliability of the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Warning against excessive speeds An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below this speed limit Note This function is only valid for some countries Coolant temperature gauge First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The coolant temperature gauge 4 Fig 2 on page 8 operates only when the ig nition is switched on The following guidelines regarding the temperature ranges must be observed to avoid any damage to the engine Cold range If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid range of the scale for a normal style of driving The pointer may also move further to the right at high engine loads and high outside temperatures CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air in let impair
91. the instructions on the display of your mobile phone 1 Does not apply for Radio Swing 132 Using the system gt If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code enter the PIN code for the SIM card in your phone The telephone connects to the hands free system during the first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the information display when the vehicle is stationary as this is the only situation when you can choose whether the PIN code should be stored gt Follow the instructions in the information display the first time a new user is stored gt Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the tele phone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the control unit Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HPP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the menu Phone New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit code that is shown on the information dis play and confirm it according to the instructions on the display of your mobile phone gt Follow the instructions on the information display and the mobile phone to store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data from the SIM card into the control unit
92. the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc tion Fig 140 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has cor rectly locked in place Belt tensioners First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 144 The safety for the driver front passenger and passengers on the outer rear seats who are wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external three point seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front EJ warnine a Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a SKODA specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident If the belt tensioners have
93. the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel 150 Safety Driver s knee airbag Fig 143 Driver s knee airbag below the steering column The driver s knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver s legs The driver s knee airbag is located in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column Fig 143 In the event of a severe frontal collision the driver s knee airbag and the belt ten sioner are deployed The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced EI WARNING a Adjust the driver s seat in a forward back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag B Fig 135 on page 142 If it is not possible to meet this requirement due to your body size visit a KODA specialist garage a The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column not have stickers attached be covered or modified in any other way This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects must be attached to the cover of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects bunch of keys etc to the igni tion key These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and can cause
94. the system Changing the battery of the radio remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 100 If the indicator light on the radio remote control indicates a weak or discharged battery C Fig 111 on page 101 it must be replaced The battery is located under a cover B Fig 111 on page 101 on the back of the radio remote control gt Insert a flat blunt object such as a coin into the gap on the battery cover turn the cover in the opposite direction of the arrow up to the mark and unlock it gt Change the battery replace the battery cover and lock it by moving it in the di rection of the arrow SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the old battery in accordance with environmental regulations Note a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery a The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the steering wheel position 104 Electromechanical power steering 104 Electronic immobiliser 104 Ignition lock 105 Starting engine 105 Switching the engine off 105 Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY system page 105 KESSY system EJ warnine a Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary s Maintain a di
95. the way back to the stop before applying the hand brake gt To open the lid pull the handle Fig 95 gt When closing the lid hold the handle until the compartment is closed l CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg in weight o Fig 97 The armrest at the rear Fig 96 The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort Armrest Stowage compartment The armrest includes a storage compartment The compartment is opened by pressing the button on the front Fig 97 and raising the cover The armrest is adjustable for height and length 88 Using the system Fig 98 Centre console at rear Stowage compartment The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert Fig 100 Rear seats Cover handle boot Unlock button gt Open the storage compartment by pulling the handle A Fig 98 in the direc tion of the arrow After folding the rear armrest and cover up an opening in the seat backrest be comes visible through which the removable through loading bag with skis can be A WARNING pushed The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passenger com partment or the boot The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire m Opening from the passenger compartment gt Fold down the rear armrest Fig 62 on page 72 gt Pull the handle upwards to the stop and fold the
96. tilted and not opened with the conven ience operating feature After each emergency operation it is necessary to activate the roof page 46 m After disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen must be activated To activate the panoramic sliding roof press the switch on the recess down and push it forward for approx 10 seconds gt 46 Using the system To activate the sun screen press and hold the switch F Fig 28 on page 45 for approx 10 seconds If the panoramic sliding roof or sun screen is not fully closed when disconnecting and reconnecting the battery they must first be closed page 45 or pushed shut page 45 Only then is it possible to perform the activation Unlocking and locking 47 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching lights on and off 49 DAY LIGHT function Daylight driving light 49 Automatic driving lamp control 49 Parking light 50 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function 50 Adaptive headlights AHL 51 Fog lights 52 Fog lights with the function CORNER 52 Rear fog lights 52 Instrument lighting 53 Headlight beam adjustment 20 53 Switches for the hazard warning light system 53 Turn signal and main beam lever 54 On models fitted with right hand steering the position of certain switches differs from that shown in Fig 30 on page 49 The symbols which mark the sw
97. to be run in during the first 1500 kilometres Up to 1000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use i e 3 4 of the maximum permissible engine speed gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1500 kilometres gt Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the gear engaged i e up to the maximum permissible engine speed During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in period is complete The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by the start of the red scale area of the revolutions counter On vehicles fitted with a manual gear box at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached During acceleration depressing the accelerator exceptionally high engine speeds are automatically reduced yet the engine is not protected against too high engine speeds which are caused by incorrectly shifting down the gears re sulting in a sudden increase of the engine speeds above the permitted maximum revolutions which can lead to engine damage For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situat
98. to the switch position A Fig 25 on page 43 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds Tilting and closing gt To tilt press the switch on the recess in the direction of the roof gt To close press the switch on the recess down and then push it forwards Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Fig 27 The panoramic sliding roof with sun screen can only be operated with the rotary switch when the ignition is switched on Fig 27 on page 45 The control dial Force limiter has several positions The panoramic sliding roof is fitted with a force limiter The panoramic sliding roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because there is something in the way e g ice The panoramic sliding roof can be fully closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess down and then pushing it forward until the panoramic sliding roof is fully closed H The panoramic sliding roof or sun screen can still be opened closed and tilted for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as one of the front doors is opened it is no longer possible to operate the panoramic sliding roof and sun screen E Note FJ warnine If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the slid Close the panoramic sliding roof carefully risk of injury ing tilting roof does not close fully This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch position A
99. tunnel or when stand ing in a traffic jam If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is rec ognized by the air quality sensor when the automatic air distribution control is switched on the air distribution control will temporarily be switched off If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level the air distribution con trol is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior When the automatic air distribution control is switched on an air quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air Switching recirculated air mode on gt Repeatedly press the button lt s 5 Fig 109 on page 97 until the indicator light on the left side of the button is illuminated Switch on automatic air distribution control gt Repeatedly press the button until the indicator light on the right side of the button is illuminated Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily gt If the air quality sensor does not automatically switch on the air distribution control in the event of an unpleasant odour you can switch it on yourself by pressing the button e4 The indicator light lights up in the button on the left side Switching recirculated air mode off gt Press the button or repeatedly press the button until the indicator lights
100. voltage of the remote control key battery change the battery Parking the vehicle If the vehicle is not unlocked within 60 or 90 hours the sensors 1 Fig 13 on page 32 and 2 in the handle of the front passenger s door are automatically de activated Activation after 60 hours gt Unlock the driver s door using the sensor 2 Fig 13 on page 32 gt Press the handle of the boot lid gt Unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key gt Unlocking the driver s door in an emergency page 35 Activation after 90 hours gt Unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key gt Unlocking the driver s door in an emergency page 35 Introductory information The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle The system triggers audible and visual warning Signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle How is the alarm system activated The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the radio remote control or the key in the driver s door The door contact monitoring is ac tivated approx 15 seconds after the locking The interior and the towing protec tion monitoring are activated approx 30 seconds after the locking If a door is opened during activation the monitoring is only activated 5 seconds after closing How is the alarm system deactivated The alarm system is deactivated by pressing
101. will result in the incor rect display a Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle bat tery is disconnected a f the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display This work is carried out by a SKODA specialist garage Co a After resetting the display with flexible service intervals the displayed data is the same as that for a vehicle with fixed service intervals We therefore recom The currently engaged gear A is shown in the instrument cluster display Fig 3 mend that the Service Interval Display is only reset by a SKODA Service Partner who will reset the display with a vehicle system tester a For more information on the service intervals Service Plan E Fig 3 Recommended gear 40 oy TELERIS 0S rad i fy SS vu a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into an other gear is indicated in the display If the control unit recognises that it is beneficial to change gear an arrow B is aE a shown in the display The arrow points up or down depending on whether you Digital clock should shift into a higher or lower gear At the same time the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently en First read and observe th
102. 1 Sealing and inflating tyres 201 Check after driving for 10 minutes 202 The breakdown kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the boot Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm Do not remove foreign bodies e g screws or nails from the tyre The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately Repairs with the breakdown kit do not in any way replace a permanent repair of the tyre it only serves to reach the next SKODA specialist garage The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt if there is damage to the wheels gt in outside temperatures of less than 20 C gt with tears or punctures greater than 4 mm in size gt if there is damage to the tyre wall gt when driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt if the use by date see inflation bottle has passed E WARNING f you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed In this way you are not only protecting yourself but other road users as well a f the wheel is damaged or in the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving cha
103. 141 Correct seated position for the driver Fig 135 The correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel and dash panel The correct head restraint adjustment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 For your own Safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the steering wheel so that there is a gap of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the chest A Fig 135 and that the distance between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag is at least 10 cm B gt Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs gt Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head c gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 144 Manual driver seat adjustment page 67 Manually adjusting the front seats Electrical driver seat adjustment page 67 Correct seated position for the front passenger First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 142 Safety B3T 0522 For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recomm
104. 158 Risk of damaging the exhaust system Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the prevailing conditions Switch off the engine and obtain professional assistance from a SKODA specialist garage otherwise it could cause severe engine damage Note Engine oil specifications page 219 Specification and engine oil capacity Replenishing the engine oil First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 176 gt Check the engine oil level page 178 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct specifi cations page 219 Specification and engine oil capacity gt Check the oil level page 178 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully Changing engine oil First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator page 10 Service Interval Display CAUTION Additives must not be added to the engine oil risk of causing considerable dam age to parts of the engine Damage which results from such product are exclu ded from the warranty Note If your skin has come into contact with oil it must be washed thoroughly Coolant F
105. 5 EJ WARNING The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants i Note a The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant applicable national legal re quirements a Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher If the fire extin guisher is used after the expiration date its proper function is no longer assured The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only Vehicle tool kit Fig 172 Boot Storage compartment for vehicle too kit The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack with sticker are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel Fig 172 or in the storage space for the spare wheel There is also space here for the removable ball rod for the trailer towing device The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts depending on equipment fitted gt wire clamps for removing the full wheel trims gt wheel wrench gt towing eye gt Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts gt Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps gt Replacement bulb set gt Torx wrench 196 Do it yourself Before placing the lifting jack back into its storage area screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully EI warnine a The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle
106. 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON and 98 RON Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 95 91 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON Unleaded petrol 91 RON can al so be used but results in a slight loss in performance If in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed oc tane number as soon as possible Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating 91 RON if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available The journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a minimum engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Unleaded petrol with higher octane number Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the en gine can be used without limitations On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95 91 RON the use of petrol with a hi
107. A Service Partner Underbody protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechani cal influences As damage to the protective layer when driving cannot be ruled out completely we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of your ve hicle and on the chassis at specific intervals preferably at the beginning and end of the winter SKODA Service Partners have suitable spray products and the necessary equip ment available and are familiar with the instructions for use We therefore rec ommend that touch up work or additional corrosion protection measures are car ried out by a SKODA Service Partner EJ warnine Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature these substances might ignite risk of fire Protection of hollow spaces First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re treated If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be re moved with a
108. Boot Side compartment left right gt The compartment is opened by turning the locks in the direction of the ar row Fig 102 On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment page 182 This compartment is marked by the symbol amp and can be opened by turning the locks e g with a coin or using a flat screwdriver The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment Fig 102 gt The first aid box can also be stored in this compartment Lockable side compartment Combi Boot Lockable side compart ment gt The compartment is opened by pulling the handle in the direction of the ar row Fig 103 The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment The first aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment Non lockable side compartment Combi Fig 104 Non lockable side compartment B3T 0355 The cover for the side compartment can be removed thus enlarging the boot gt Grasp the top part of the cover and carefully remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig 104 CAUTION Ensure that the side compartment cover and the mount for the cover are not damaged during installation or removal Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the head liner above each of the rear doors FJ warnine a Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear Only
109. Combi lt gt Press the button 2 Fig 12 Further information page 39 Folding out the key bit gt Press the button 4 Fig 12 Folding in the key bit gt Press the button 4 Fig 12 and fold in the key bit Unlocking The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un locked If the vehicle is unlocked using button 1 Fig 12 and none of the doors or the boot lid are opened within the next 30 seconds the vehicle is automatical ly locked again and the safe securing system or anti theft alarm system is reacti vated This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentional ly In addition when the car is unlocked the electrically adjustable seats and exteri Or mirrors move into the position assigned to this key The stored setting of driver seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved Locking The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed When the vehicle is unlocked or locked the interior lights and entry lighting are automatically switched on or off via the door contact F WARNING If the car is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is activated there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to open ei ther a door or a window from the inside
110. FIX logo Fig 149 A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fitted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of vehicle Further information is available from a SKODA Service Partner EI warnine a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system a Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the locking eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system hazard Note Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from SKODA Original Acces sories Child seat with the TOP TETHER system Fig 150 Rear seat TOP TETHER First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 154 There are fixing eyes on the rear side of the rear seat backrests for attaching the fixing belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER system Fig 150 EJ WARNING a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system a Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the locking eyes Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye a On no account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other an chorage points Transporting children safely 157 Driving Tips New engine The engine has
111. Fig 109 on page 97 switched on The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro vide cooling at a high load of the engine Recommended setting for all periods of the year gt Set the desired temperature we recommend 22 C gt Press the button Fig 109 on page 97 gt Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 so that the air flow is directed slightly up wards Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off On models fitted with power sliding tilting roof with sollar cells the fresh air blower is automatically switched over to solar mode if the sun ray s are suffi cient after switching off the ignition The solar cells on the sliding tilting roof de liver power for the fresh air blower This supplies the interior of the car with fresh air For an optimum ventilation the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be opened Fig 106 on page 94 The ventilation functions only when the sliding tilting roof is closed i Note a We recommend that you have the Climatronic system cleaned by a KODA spe cialist garage once every year a On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted radio or radio navigation system the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays This function can be switched off see operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Overview of the control elements PASSENGER AIR BAG ddi Fig 109 Climatronic Control elements The buttons Defrost win
112. MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb MG6 4x4 Combi MG6 Combi DSG7 Combi MG6 4x4 Top speed km h 220 220 217 218 218 215 Acceleration O 100 km h s 8 6 8 5 8 7 8 7 8 6 8 8 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 1700 16002 1800 1500 1700 16002 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 147 5100 6000 280 1700 5000 4 1984 Performances Superb DSG6 Combi DSG6 Top speed km h 236 234 Acceleration O 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Technical data 221 3 6 Itr 191 kW FSI engine 191 6000 350 2500 5000 6 3597 Performances Superb DSG6 4x4 Combi DSG6 4x4 Top speed km h 250 247 Acceleration O 100 km h s 6 5 6 6 Permissible trailer load braked kg 2000 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR engine Performances Superb MG5 Superb MG5 GreenLine Combi MG5 Combi MG5 GreenLine Top speed km h 189 Acceleration O 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 1700 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 222 Technical data 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm
113. RT STOP button is pressed Conditions for an automatic restart without driver intervention gt The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km h gt The difference between the outdoor and the set temperature in the interior is too great gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is not sufficient gt There is insufficient pressure in the braking system If the driver s seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver s door is opened during stop mode the engine must be started manually with the key The following messages in the instrument cluster display must be observed Messages in the instrument cluster display valid for vehicles without Information display ERROR START STOP Error in the START STOP system START STOP NOT POSSIBLE Automatic engine shut down is not possible START STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut down stop phase SWITCH OFF IGNITION Switch off the ignition SPART MAMIALEY Start the engine manually FJ wARNING The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off CAUTION If the START STOP system is used at very high outside temperatures over a very long period of time the vehicle battery can be damaged Note a Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temper ature of the vehicle battery even after several hours If the vehicle remains out
114. Refuelling 174 Fuel 174 Regulation Headlight beam 53 Remote control 30 Synchronisation process 32 Remote control key Replacing the battery 27 Removable lamp Combi 57 Replacement of parts 194 Replacing Bulbs 210 Fuses 207 Vehicle battery 186 Windscreen wiper blade 62 Replenishing Coolant 180 Engine oil 179 Windscreen washer fluid 182 Roof luggage rack Attachment points 82 Roof rack system Roof load 82 Running in Brake pads 158 Engine 158 The first 1500 km Tyres S Safe securing system Safety Child safety Child safety seats Head restraints ISOFIX TOP TETHER Save electrical energy Seat Adjusting 158 158 29 140 154 154 156 156 159 67 Seat belt Indicator light Seat belt height adjuster Seat belts Belt tensioners Cleaning fastening and unfastening Height adjustment Seats 20 147 147 173 146 147 folding forward Head restraints Heating Ventilated front seats Selector lever see selector lever positions Selector lever positions Service display Setting Automatic dimming interior mirror Manual air conditioning system Manual dimming interior mirror Steering wheel Setting the clock Clock Shifting Diving economically Gearshift lever Side airbag Sliding tilting roof see Electric sliding tilting roof Snow chains 159 112 151
115. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Superb Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Sub ject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the informa tion you are looking for Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement All values are expressed in metric units Explanation of symbols a Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety advice in a chapter Denotes the end of a section Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possi ble Denotes a registered trademark Ov E Notes EI WARNING The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle e g
116. Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads risk of injury a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot i Note Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preliminary work 197 Changingawheel _ S Subsequent steps 198 Loosening and tightening wheel bolts 198 Raising the vehicle Sa Securing wheels against theft 199 EI WARNING a f you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed In this way you are not only protecting yourself but other road users as well a f the wheel is damaged or in the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible BE WARNING Continued f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away a If the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with at the works follow these guidelines page 189 New wheels and tyres Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed a Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with
117. a nism can be damaged The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied correctly Water can penetrate and cause damage to the vehicle if the cover was not applied correctly E Note a We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of re placement fuses can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories a Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device a Multiple power consuming devices can share a single fuse a Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been eliminated Fuses and light bulbs 207 Fuses in the dash panel 4 B3T 0533 Fig 183 Fuse box cover Schematic diagram of the fuse box First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 207 The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover gt Remove the cover for the fuse box using a screwdriver Fig 183 gt Replace the cover once the fuse has been changed Fuse assignment in the dash panel Power consumer Diagnostic socket engine control unit fuel pump relay fuel pump control unit Control unit for ABS ESC switch for the tyre control display brake 2 sensor 3 Switch and airbag control unit 4 WIV tail lights dimming mirrors pressure sensor telephone preinstal lation Contr
118. a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard Note a The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the safe securing system is deactivated The interior monitor is however not activa ted a After locking the vehicle you will be informed that the safe securing system is activated by means of the message CHECK DEADLOCK on the instrument cluster display On vehicles that are equipped with an information display the following message will appear Check deadlock Owner s manual appears Unlocking andlocking 29 Vehicle locking unlocking from the inside Fig 11 Central locking button 537 0261 The doors and the boot lid can be unlocked locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front passenger door Fig 11 even when the ignition is not switched on The central locking button works only when the vehicle was not locked from the outside and all doors are closed Locking Press the symbol Fig 1 on the button The symbol in the button comes on Unlocking Press the symbol Fig 11 on the button The symbol in the button is no longer illuminated The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside safety fea ture e g when stopping at traffic lights etc
119. actory fitted auxiliary heating is installed The menu item Assistants is only then displayed if the vehicle is fitted with fati gue detection i Note If the information display is not activated at that moment the menu always shifts to one of the higher levels after approx 10 seconds Settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 You can change certain settings by means of the information display The current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top be low the line You can select the following information Language Autom blind MFD data Convenience Lights amp Vision Time Winter tyres Units Assistants Alternative speed displayed Service Factory setting Back Select the menu item Back to return to one level higher in the menu Language You can set the language for the warning and information texts here Automatic blind Combi This is where the automatic roll up function of the boot roll cover can be deacti vated activated when opening the boot lid MFD displays Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here Comfort This is where the following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted Switch on off the function for automatically closing the window and panoramic tilt slide sunroof in a locked ve hicle when it starts raining If the function i
120. airbags will not deploy properly or not at all in the event of an accident Do it yourself Fig 171 Placing of the warning triangle The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber straps Fig 171 EJ warnine The warning triangle must always be secured safely so that it does not come loose in the event of emergency braking or a vehicle collision and cause inju Fig 170 Compartment for stowing first aid box compartment for stowing ries to occupants first aid box Combi The compartment for stowing the first aid box is located in the right of the i Note boot Fig 170 We recommend using a warning triangle from KODA Original Accessories availa ble from a KODA Service Partner m F warnine The first aid box must always be secured safely so that it does not come loose in the event of emergency braking or a vehicle collision and cause injuries to Fire extinguisher occupants The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat i Note Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguish er a Pay attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit P oo hack eee Ib a We recommend using a first aid box from KODA Original Accessories available The nE extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person on an annual ba foma SKODA Service Partner w sis the national legal provisions must be observed gt Do it yourself 19
121. all boot lid can also be opened by pressing the button s on the remote control key 2 for approx 1 second A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid 36 Using the system Fig 18 Handle of boot lid opened large boot lid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 35 The large boot lid Fig 18 can be opened after unlocking the vehicle Opening gt Press the handle 1 Fig 18 on the bottom edge of the boot lid gt Wait until the brake light 2 in the rear window flashes twice gt Press the handle 3 and simultaneously lift up the boot lid Closing gt Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing The bonnet locks auto matically A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked au tomatically The vehicle should therefore always be locked with the button amp on the radio remote control E TONS Handle of boot lid B3T 0267 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 35 The boot lid can be opened by pressing the handle above the licence plate after unlocking the vehicle using the remote control key or key Fig 20 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid Opening gt Press the handle and simultaneously lift up the boot lid Fi
122. allation hands free system at the factory The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current tele phone If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated Operation Switch on off the voice control Button PTT Push to talk Cancellation of the played message Turn upwards Increase volume Turn downwards Decrease volume Press briefly Press button for a long pe riod of time Accept call end call entry in the main menu of the telephone list of the dialed numbers call the dialed contact Reject call private call Reject call list of the last calls access to the main menu of the phone list of dialled numbers Press briefly Reach one level higher in the menu according to the current position in the menu Press button for a long pe riod of time Leave the phone menu Press briefly Press button for a long pe riod of time Confirm menu selection To the next initial letter in the telephone book Turn upwards The last chosen menu selection name Turn downwards The next menu selection name ESE ESS e e e Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book 4 Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book a Applies to GSM II b Applies to GSM Ill Communication 127 Symbols in the information display Importance C
123. also lower Snow chains First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels When driving on wintry roads snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel tyre combinations Wheel size Depth D Tyre size 7 x 162 45mm 205 55 6J x 16 50 mm 205 55 6J x 17 45 mm 205 50 a Not valid for vehicles with 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine Only use fine link snow chains They must not project more than 9 mm includ ing the chain lock Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains CAUTION The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed Wheels and Tyres 193 Introductory information If you want to retrofit the vehicle with accessories if a vehicle part is to be re placed with a new one or when needing to make technical changes the follow ing instructions must be observed gt Always seek advice from a SKODA Service Partner before purchasing any acces sories or parts and before making any technical changes H g
124. an replace if necessary page 209 Fuses in the engine compartment If the indicator light does not go off even though the coolant level is correct and the fuse for the fan is in working order do not continue driving Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EJ warnine a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 a Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot the cooling system is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap a Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically even if the ignition is off Bonnet gt The indicator light comes on if the bonnet is unlocked F WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Boot lid lt The indicator light lt comes on if the boot lid is opened FI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Power steering steering lock KESSY system 9 Power steering If the indicator light lights up this indicates a partial fai
125. an be directly switched on or off at any time using the button amp Fig 110 on the operating part of the air conditioning system on the operating part of the Climatronic system or via the radio remote control page 101 If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is not switched off earlier it switches off automatically after the set operating period in the menu Running time has ex pired System settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 100 The following menu items can be selected in the menu Aux heating in the infor mation display depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle Weekday Set the current weekday Time Set the desired running time in 5 minute increments The running time can be 10 to 60 minutes Mode Set the desired heating ventilation mode Start time 1 3 In each pre set time the day and the time hour and minute can be set for switching on the auxiliary heating and or ventilation An empty posi tion can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day If this empty position is selected the activation is performed without taking into ac count the day Activate Enable pre set mode Dectivate Disable pre set mode Factory setting Restore factory setting Back Return to main menu Only one programmed pre set time can be active The last programmed pre set time remains active After the auxiliary heating
126. and safety warn ings H on page 141 Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an in correct routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and pas sengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains examples of which seated positions can cause serious injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiar ise yourself with this subject Therefore while the car is moving never gt stand up in the vehicle gt stand up on the seats gt kneel on the seats gt tilt the seat backrest fully to the back gt lean against the dash panel gt lie on the rear seat bench gt only sit on the front area of the seat gt sit to the side gt lean out of the window gt put the feet out of the window gt put the feet on the dash panel gt put the feet on the seat upholstery gt transport somebody in the footwell gt have the seat belt not fastened when driving gt be in the boot Passive Safety 143 CQ Introduction Fig 136 Driver wearing seat belt g d B3T 0387 This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a
127. and seat backr ests on the front seats The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch Fig 57 in the front part of the seat cushion in front of the seat control elements for the electric front seat adjustment gt Thew ventilation of the front seat is switch on by toggling the rocker switch in to position 1 lower intensity or position 2 higher intensity Seats andStowage 69 gt To switch off the ventilation shift the rocker switch into the horizontal position The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant Cor rectly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protec tion for the occupants page 141 Correct seated position E WARNING N ae EI WARNING If you or a passenger have limited pain and or temperature sensitivity e g caused by medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes a The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated protection for the occupants in the event of an accident front seat a Never drive with the head restraints removed risk of injury a f the rear seats are occupied the rear head restraint must not be in the p CAUTION lower position Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points to avoid damaging the electronic seat elements or the fan a The fan is located underneath the fro
128. appear and the following menu items Help this menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory of the control unit Connect this menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stored in the memory of the control unit New user Media player Active device Paired devices Search Visibility SOS If a telephone is coupled with the hands free system the following menu items can be selected in the menu Phone Phone book In the menu item Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the tele phone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone The following functions are available for each phone contact Display telephone number Voice Tag Replay Record 1 Only applies when connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile Dial number Any telephone number can be written in the menu item Dial number The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel The numbers 0 9 symbols and the functions Delete Call Back can be selected Call register The following menu items can be selected in the menu item Call register Missed calls Received calls Dialled numbers Delete lists Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number The required numbers must be selected one after the other using
129. arried in the boot must be stored in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward if any sudden driving or braking manoeuvres are un dertaken risk of injury When transporting fastened objects which are sharp and dangerous in the boot that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats page 142 a f the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied ensure maxi mum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision a Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning a Under no circumstances should the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle be exceeded risk of accident Never transport people in the boot CAUTION Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the follow ing a heating elements in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear side windows Estate car Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 188 Class N1 vehicles First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 On class N1 vehicles which are not fitted with a protective grille a lashing set which c
130. asic position not dimmed Note a Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear view mirror is not affected by other objects Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor so that they do not impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation a f the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off Lights and visibility 65 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manually adjusting the front seats 67 Adjusting front seats electrically 67 Memory function of the power seat 68 Memory function of the remote control key 68 The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for gt safely and quickly reaching the controls gt a relaxed fatigue free body position gt achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system EI warnine Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of accident Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injur
131. ast 60 km h H at engine speeds of 1800 2 500 rpm for at least 15 mi nutes or until the indicator light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged auto matic gearbox position S when the traffic situation permits it The indicator light only goes out after the diesel particulate filter has been successfully cleaned If the filter is not properly cleaned the indicator light does not go out and the indicator light o gt begins to flash The following is displayed in the information display Diesel particulate filter Owner s manual 24 Using the system The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode After switching the ignition off and on again the indicator light the indicator light also lights up Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EI warnine a The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures Therefore do not park in areas where the hot filter can come into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials risk of fire Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the indicator light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic CAUTION As long as the indicator light lights up one must take into account an in creased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine Note To assist the combustion process of the soot particles
132. at diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic The SKODA Service Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with infor mation regarding the diesel fuels available Preheating fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of 25 C Fuel additives Fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar products must not be added to the diesel fuel CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the stand ard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and exhaust sys tem a f a different fuel other than diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Extensive damage to engine parts can occur We recommend that the fuel system is cleaned by a SKODA Service Partner a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults a Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system 176 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening and closing the bonnet SSCS E
133. ated gradually from a speed of 90 km h It is most effective at speeds above 120 km h Tourist light This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When the tou rist light mode is active the above mentioned modes and the side swivel of the headlights is deactivated The tourist light mode is activated deactivated via the information display in the menu Settings Travel mode Off Switched on Cornering lights The cornering lights are used to illuminate the curves by means of the cone of light swivelling together with the front headlight with Xenon lights This function is active when the speed of the car increases to more than 10 km h FI warnine If the cornering lights are defective the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened Drive carefully and visit a SKODA specialist garage as soon as possible Note The AHL system complements the functions of the fog lights with the function CORNER page 52 and the function of the dynamic headlight beam adjustment Lights and visibility 51 gt the fog lights are not switched on gt no reverse gear is engaged Fig 32 hia Note Dash panel Light switch If the reverse gear is engaged during the active function CORNER both fog l
134. aving the vehicle the ignition must always be removed This is par ticularly important if children are left in the vehicle Otherwise the children could for example start the engine risk of accident or injury a Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas hazard Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious ness and death a Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running a Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent CAUTION a The starter may only be operated ignition key position 3 Fig 113 on page 105 if the engine is not running The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activated when the engine is running Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts otherwise the starter could be damaged a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads as long as the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the en gine Do not tow start the engine danger of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage the catalytic converter The battery from an other vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 202 Jump starting a Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end
135. bjects can no longer fall into the space between the boot floor and the variable loading floor gt Grasp the rear part of the variable loading floor by the handle raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 72 and pull it out over the bumper in the di rection of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C Fig 72 gt To push the variable loading floor back into place grasp the part of the floor by the handle raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 and push it forwards up to the stop CAUTION Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged Removing and installing the variable loading floor Fig 73 Dividing the boot aN 837 0325 Fig 75 Boot remove variable loading floor The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled if necessary The boot can be divided with the variable loading floor gt Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle raise it in direction of arrow Removing 1 Fig 72 on page 77 and insert the rear edge in one of the openings gt Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle raise it slightly in the direction of A Fig 73 the arrow 1 Fig 74 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C Fig 75 gt Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 74 The variable loading floor can be pulled out a lit
136. button C Fig 133 The indicator lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are already assigned and flash in the case of free mem ory spaces gt Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD case B Ejecting a CD gt Press the button A Fig 133 to eject a CD For assigned memory spaces the indicator lights now illuminate in the buttons D gt Press the corresponding button D The CD is ejected Ejecting all CDs gt Press and hold the button A Fig 133 for more than 2 seconds All CDs in the CD changer are ejected consecutively i Note a Always guide the CD into the CD case B Fig 133 with the printed side facing upwards Never force the CD into the CD case as it is drawn in automatically After loading a CD into the CD changer wait until the indicator light of the cor responding button D is illuminated Then the CD case B is free to load the next CD a f a position is selected on which a CD is already located this CD is ejected Re move the ejected CD and load the desired CD DVD preinstallation Fig 134 Seat backrest left front seat right front seat Description A Openings for attachment of DVD player holder Audio video input Connection input DVD player Only one DVD pre installation is factory installed in the seat backrest of the front seat The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from KODA original ac cessories For a d
137. central locking system fails page 35 The other doors and the boot lid can be manually locked or unlocked a Emergency locking of the door page 35 a Emergency unlocking of the boot lid page 37 Safe securing system The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside The indi cator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle The safe securing system can be deactivated within 2 seconds by double locking the vehicle If the safe securing system is not in operation gt the indicator light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds goes out and starts to flash at regular longer intervals after about 30 seconds gt is the filler flap locked The safe securing system is activated again the next time the vehicle is unlocked and locked If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated the vehicle can be opened from the inside by pulling the door opening lever FJ warnine If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti vated there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then no longer pos sible to open either
138. ching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it a Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface a The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel Note a Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection a Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months remove any fresh stains as they occur a Also look after the leather dye Refresh any areas with a special coloured leath er cream as required a The leather is a natural material with specific properties During the use of the vehicle minor optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers Seat belts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 167 Keep the seat belts clean Clean dirty seat belts using a mild soapy solution and remove coarse dirt with a soft brush Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from reeling up the b
139. cle Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle risk of accident The maximum permissible speed for your tyres must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control of the vehicle If the inflation pressure is too low the tyre must perform a higher rolling re sistance At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout BE WARNING Continued Do not where possible replace individual tyres but at least replace them on both wheels of a given axle at the same time Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels a Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at high speeds on wet roads One could experience aquaplaning uncontrolled movements of the vehicle swimming on a wet road surface Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres a Do not use summer or winter tyres that are older than 6 years or 4 years re spectively The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily However they must never be treated with grease or oil a f the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can come lo
140. cle drives backwards into the park ing space gt the automatic turning of the front wheels when parking Starting off and Driving 113 FI warnine The park assist does not take away the responsibility from the driver when parking a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the park assist sys tem and parking aid Under unfavourable conditions objects or people may not be recognised CAUTION a f other vehicles are parked behind or on the kerb the park assist guides your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it Ensure that the wheels or the wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time Under certain circumstances surfaces or structures of certain objects such as wire mesh fences powder snow etc cannot be recognised by the system The evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depends on the circumference of the wheels The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fit ted with the wheel size approved by the manufacturer If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted the resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a SKODA specialist garage Under certain circumstances the sys tem may not function correctly for example if the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or a temporary spare wheel i Note a The traction control system TCS must always be switche
141. clutch system overheats the symbol lt is shown in the information dis play along with the message Gearbox overheated Stop Owner s man appears An audible signal sounds as a warning signal Stop the vehicle switch off the en gine and wait until the symbol amp disappears risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the symbol disappears Introductory information First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically The gearbox can also be switched to Tiptronic mode This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually page 123 The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N If the selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering switch ing the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on the following message will appear in the Information display Move selector lever to position P N or in the instrument cluster display gt P N At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in the selector lever position P Automatic gearbox 121 When parking on a level road surface it suffices to engage selector lever position P When parking on a slope the handbrake should be applied firmly before the park position is selected This ensures that there is no excessive pressure on the lock mechanism and that it is subsequently
142. commend having these bulbs replaced by a KODA specialist garage Fig 38 Reading lights Front reading lights gt Press switch Fig 38 to switch the reading lights on or off gt When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on gt The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and goes out when the flap is closed Fig 39 Interior light and rear reading lights Interior light gt The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior light page 54 Lights and visibility 55 Reading lights The warning light goes on every time the door is opened The light goes out gt Press switch Fig 39 to switch the reading lights on or off about 10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light Hi Interior lights at the rear The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid The light goes out after switching on the ignition or within 30 seconds of closing all of the doors and the boot lid If a door or the boot lid remains open the light goes out within 2 minutes if the ignition is switched off
143. ctrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Before starting the engine place the gearshift lever into neutral or place the se lector lever in the position P or N and firmly put on the handbrake gt Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal switch on the ignition 2 Fig 113 on page 105 and start 3 do not operate the accelerator Depress the clutch pedal until the engine starts gt Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts After letting go the vehicle key will return to position 2 gt If the engine does not start within 10 seconds abort the start up process and turn the key to position 1 Repeat the start up process after approx half a mi nute gt Release the handbrake before starting off The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following is displayed in the information display Depress clutch to start The following is shown in the information display of the information cluster CLUTCH E First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 Fig 113 on page 105 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking and locking the steering 106 Switching on the ignition 107 Switching off the ignition Starting off and Driving 105 Emergen
144. cupant The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to in juries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag a Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a prop er restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries a It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attach ing a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel page 152 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal inju ries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats a The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not have stickers attached be covered or modi fied in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup holders mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity a Never place objects on
145. cy ignition shutoff system 107 Starting engine S Emergency start up of engine 108 Switching the engine off 108 The KESSY system makes it possible to switch the ignition on off and to start stop the engine without actively using the key A valid key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering switch on the steering and start the vehicle EI warnine a Never switch off the ignition while driving as the electromechanical power steering and brake booster will no longer operate risk of accident a Never leave the valid keys in the vehicle if leaving children unattended in the vehicle Otherwise the children could start the engine risk of accident i Note a After pressing the starter button while the steering is locked the steering is un locked the electrical components are activated e g radio navigation system etc and the igntion is switched on a f you do not leave the vehicle after locking the steering and wish to unlock the steering again press the starter button At the same time electrical components are activated e g radio navigation system etc and the ignition is switched on a The KESSY system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while driving this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen cy page 107 a The steering is not unlocked or locked if the starter button is repeatedly press ed at short intervals 106 Using the system Unlocking an
146. cylinders First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Specific products must be used for de icing door lock cylinders Note a When washing your vehicle ensure as little water as possible gets into the lock ing cylinders We recommend that suitable materials from KODA Original Accessories are used for maintaining the door lock cylinders Wheels First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular ba sis Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion from the wheel rims otherwise the material will be affected Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims FJ warnine Water ice and grit in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Note We recommend that any repairs to damaged paintwork are carried out by a SKOD
147. d The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km hour page 12 If you wish to determine the average speed over a certain pe riod of time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button B Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the ad justment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel After erasing the memory no value appears in the display until you have driven approx 300 m The display is updated regularly while you are driving Current speed The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer 2 Fig 2 on page 8 is indicated on the display Oil temperature If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present only is displayed instead of the oil tempera ture Warning against excessive speeds First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 12 Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt With the button A Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel select the menu item Warning against excessive speeds gt Activate the option for setting the speed limit the value flashes with the but ton B on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi function steering wheel gt Set the desired speed limi
148. d a If you wish a KODA Service Partner can activate or deactivate the delayed auto matic locking of the boot lid The Service Partner will also provide any further in formation that is required Unlocking andlocking 37 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preliminary information 8B Description of the operation 39 Audible signals 39 Adjusting the top position ofthe lid _ gt 40 Operational problems 40F Preliminary information Fig 22 Operation of the lid Button on the centre console designation of the areas 38 Using the system Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 If the electrical opening of the lid was triggered using the button on the remote control key or the button on the centre console an intermittent audible signal sounds while the lid is moving The electric boot lid is fitted with a force limiter If the lid hits an obstacle when closing it stops and an audible signal sounds If you rapidly enter the vehicle dur ing the opening or closing process of the boot lid the whole vehicle may jerk and as aresult the movement of the lid can be interrupted The force limiter is activa ted Manually opening and closing the boot lid is only possible in exceptional cases and must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the centre of the lid as possible Handling the sides of the lid can damage the e
149. d be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray CAUTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand risk of damage Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig 48 Windscreen wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 62 Using the system Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade put the windscreen wiper arms into the service position Service position for changing wiper blades gt Closing the bonnet gt Switch the ignition off and on again gt Then press the windscreen wiper lever into position 4 Fig 47 on page 60 within 10 seconds the wiper arms move into the service position Removing the wiper blade gt Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen gt Press the locking button 1 Fig 48 to unlock the wiper blade and pull off in the direction of the arrow 2 Attaching the wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arms back to the windscreen gt Turn on the ignition and press the windscreen wiper lever into position 4 Fig 47 on page 60 the windscreen wiper arms move to the home position Replacing the rear window wiper blade Combi Fig 49 Rear window wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and saf
150. d by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door The opening process stops when one releases the button gt Additionally the window can be opened automatically fully open by pressing the button to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door The closing process stops when one releases the button gt Additionally the window can be closed automatically fully closed by pulling the button to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately Force limiter of the power windows First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows 42 Using the system If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been re moved the closing process is only stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the win
151. d it is correctly inserted in the holder the bulbs in the front part C Fig 42 on page 57 of the lamp are automatically switched Fig 42 Removeable lamp A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the boot This lamp has two func tions off gt lighting the boot it illuminates part B Fig 42 the lamp is in the holder The removed light can operate for a max of 24 hours at an intensity of 100 gt portable lamp it illuminates part C the lamp has been removed from the and a max of 48 hours at an intensity of 50 holder If the lamp is in the holder it is automatically switched on when the boot lid is Replacing the rechargeable batteries of the lamp opened If the boot lid remains open for more than 10 minutes the light switches off automatically Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries your The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries The rechargeable self batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running It takes approx 3 gt Remove the lamp hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries gt Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed object from the location of the lock off clips F Fig 42 on page 57 gt Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp gt Insert the new rechargeable batteries gt Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it clicks
152. d locking the steering Fig 114 Starter button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 105 Unlocking gt Open the driver s door and get into the vehicle gt Close the driver s door and the steering is unlocked within 2 seconds Locking gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button Fig 114 gt Open the driver s door and the steering is locked If the driver s door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards the steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked If the steering is locked and the KESSY system does not manage to unlock the steering lock the first time e g if the wheels are resting against the curb the at tempt will be repeated twice by the system If the steering lock is then not unlocked the following is shown in the informa tion display or information display of the instrument cluster Move steering wheel or MOVE STEERING Slightly move the steering and the system will complete 3 more attempts to un lock after 2 seconds At the same time the indicator light flashes If the steering lock still does not unlock the following message is displayed in the information display for 10 seconds Steering wheel still locked It is necessary to eliminate the possible cause which is preventing the unlocking and then repeat the attempt to unlock the steering Switching on the ignition First
153. d on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Ifa trailer is connected remove it gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 196 and the spare wheel page 190 from the boot Changing a wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 196 Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible gt Remove the full wheel trim page 191 or caps page 191 gt In the case of light alloy wheel rims remove the wheel trim cap page 191 gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts page 198 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground page 199 gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Alternately tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench crosswise and then tighten the anti theft wheel bolt page 198 gt Replace the wheel trim or the caps Note a All bolts must be clean and must turn easily a Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the direction o
154. d on when parking a Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer applies only to ve hicles with a factory fitted towing device This is why it is not possible to reverse into a parking space with the help of the park assist system when towing a trailer a If the sensors find a suitable parking space they store its parameters until an other suitable parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven after finding the parking space This is why it is possible to switch on the park assist after driving past the parking space and the information on whether this parking space is suitable for parking appears in the information display 114 Using the system Park assist display on the information display 18 5 tii 12440 1253 2 Fig 121 Switch on display of the park assist in the information display infor mation display Finding a suitable parking space First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 Switching on gt Press the button Fig 121 gt Drive past the parking space at up to maximum 30 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m Fig 121 The search area for the parking space on the driver s side is automatically indica ted on the information display Activate the turn signal on the driver s side if you wish to park on this side of the road In the information display the search area for the parking space is indicated on the driver s
155. dicator Lights 15 Main menu Fig 7 Information display Control elements on the windscreen wiper lever control elements on the multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 Operating with the buttons on the windscreen wiper lever gt Activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch A Fig 7 for longer gt Individual menu items can be selected by means of the rocker switch A When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed the information you have selected is dis played Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel gt Activate the Main menu by pressing and holding the button C Fig 7 fora short while gt By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher gt The individual menus can be selected by pressing the adjustment wheel D The selected menu is displayed after briefly pressing the adjustment wheel D You can select the following information MFD page 12 Audio Operating instructions for the radio Navigation Operating instructions for the navigation system Phone page 126 Aux Heating page 100 Assistants page 119 Vehicle status page 18 Settings page 16 16 Using the system The menu items Audio and Navigation are only displayed when the factory fitted radio or navigation system is switched on The menu item Aux heating is only displayed if a f
156. dicator light flashes in the in strument cluster The TCS indicator light page 23 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the TCS If necessary the TCS can be switched off and on again by pressing the button Fig 118 or on vehicles with ESP by pressing the button 8 Fig 117 on page 110 The TCS indicator light amp lights up in the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off Electronic differential lock EDL First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 108 If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down Starting off and Driving 111 Shifting manual gearbox Fig 119 Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or 6 gear manual gearbox Always depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gear to prevent excessive wear of the clutch The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 11 Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depre
157. dow The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again Window convenience operation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 The electrically powered windows can be opened and closed as follows when un locking and locking the vehicle Opening gt Press and hold the unlock button 3 on the remote control key gt Press and hold the upper part of the central locking button in the driver s door Closing gt Press and hold the lock button 8 on the remote control key gt Press and hold the lower part of the central locking button in the driver s door gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt With the KESSY system cover the sensor 2 Fig 13 on page 32 You can interrupt the opening or closing process for the windows immediately by releasing the key or the lock button Operational faults First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 Electrically operated power windows do not operate If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected while the window was opened the electrically operated power windows do not operate The system must be activated Proceed as follows in order to re estab
158. dscreen intensively Air flow to the windows Air flow to head Air flow in the footwell Recirculated air mode with air quality sensor Rear window heater eeN The buttons control dial Setting of the temperature for the left side operation of the seat heating of the left front seat Automatic mode 9 Switching off Climatronic The air conditioning system 97 Setting the blower speed s Depending upon vehicle equipment Button for direct switching on off of auxiliary heating 8 Fig 110 on page 101 or switching on off of windscreen heater Fig 43 on page 58 Switching on off of the temperature setting in dual mode Switching the cooling system on and off AQ Setting of the temperature for the right side operation of the seat heating of the right front seat fslia is I B Note Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor Do not stick anything on or cover the sensor otherwise it could have an unfavourable ef fect on the Climatronic Automatic mode The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car Switching on gt Set a temperature between 18 C and 26 C gt Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 Fig 106 on page 94 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards gt Press the button Fig 109 on page 97 The indicator light in the top right or left corner lights up depending
159. duce the range The auxiliary heating can only be switched on off safely using the radio remote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m Warning light in the radio remote control The indicator light in the radio remote control C Fig 111 indicates after a key stroke if the remote control signal was received by the auxiliary heating and if the battery is adequately charged Display indicator light Importance Display indicator light Importance o Lights up green for 2 seconds The auxiliary heating was switched on Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds The ignition signal was not received The auxiliary heating is blocked e g because the tank is nearly empty or there is a fault in the auxiliary heating Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds Flashes red for 2 seconds Lights up orange for 2 seconds then green or red The switch off signal was not received The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was received The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived The battery is discharged however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived Lights up orange for 2 seconds then flashes green or red Flashes orange for 5 seconds l CAUTION The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore be protected against water severe impacts and direct sunlight 102 Using
160. e First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Engine revolutions counter page 9 Speedometer page 9 Button for display mode gt Setting the hours minutes gt Activating deactivating the second speed in mph or km h gt Service intervals Display of the number of days and kilometres remaining until the next Inspection Service Coolant temperature gauge page 9 Display gt With counter for distance driven page 10 With service interval display page 10 With digital clock page 11 With multifunction display page 12 With information display page 15 Fuel gauge page 9 Button for gt Reset trip counter for the distance driven gt Resetting Service Interval Display gt Set hours minutes gt Activate deactivate display mode vvv Vv Engine revolutions counter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The red scale of the rev counter 1 Fig 2 on page 8 indicates the range in which the engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed The engine control unit restricts the engine speed to a steady limit You should shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the revolution counter is reached or move the selector lever into position D if your car is fitted with an automatic gearbox To maintain the optimum motor speed observe the gearshift indica tor page 11 For the sake of
161. e front passenger door For some countries the sticker is also affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger a If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is used on the front passenger seat the front passenger seat must be moved back and to the top fully Move the backrest into the vertical position The front passenger airbag must be reactivated as soon as you no longer use a child seat on the front passenger seat Child safety and side airbag Fig 148 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured risk from the side airbag Child properly protected by safety seat First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 154 The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side air bag Fig 148 A There must be sufficient room between the child and the de ployment area of the side airbag so that the airbag can provide as much protec tion as possible Fig 148 B FJ warnine a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags risk of injury Classification of child seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 154 Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups Group Weight of the child Approximate age 0 0 10
162. e 200 Sealing gt Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 Fig 177 on page 201 several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clockwise direction The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 Do it yourself 201 Inflating gt Screw the tyre inflation hose 5 Fig 177 on page 201 of the air compressor firmly onto the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 84 Cigarette lighter 12 volt power socket gt Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Maximum run time of 8 minutes P gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre gt Firmly screw the tyre infla
163. e 91 Non lockable side compartment Combi page 91 EJ warninec Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down when driving when accelerating or cornering and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic risk of accident When driving ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes operate the clutch or accelerator risk of accident The storage compartments must always be closed when driving for safety reasons Storage compartment on the front passenger side HORS Dash panel Storage compart ment on the front passenger side Open close gt Press the button Fig 87 and the lid folds down gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment Seats and Stowage 85 Cooling the storage compartment on the front passenger side Fig 88 Storage compartment Using cooling system gt Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow Fig 88 gt The air supply is closed by pressing the lever Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or inte rior air to flow into the storage compartment We recommend cl
164. e accordingly Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced There are a wide range of influences when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt through vibration in the steering Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear and tear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety In the event of any unusual tyre wear seek assistance from a SKODA specialist garage Tyre damage Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and where possible at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately reduce your speed and stop Check the tyres for signs of damage bulges splits etc If no ex ternal damage is evident drive slowly and carefully to the nearest SKODA special ist garage to have the vehicle checked Handling wheels and tyres Fig 165 Changing wheels around First read and observe the introductory inf
165. e battery B battery provid ing current First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 202 The jump start cables must be attached in the following sequence Connecting positive terminals gt Attach one end 1 Fig 178 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery gt Attach the other end 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power B Connecting negative terminal and engine block gt Attach one end 3 Fig 178 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power B gt Attach the other end 4 to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the engine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle gt Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start terminate the attempt to start the engine after 10 seconds and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the process gt Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above Do it yourself 203 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 202 On vehicles with the START STOP system the jump start cable of the charger must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth
166. e book Dial number Call register Voice mailbox Bluetooth Settings Back Phone book In the menu item Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the tele phone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone Dial number Any telephone number can be written in the menu item Dial number The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel Numbers 0 9 symbols gt k and the functions Cancel Call Delete can be selected Call register The following menu items can be selected in the menu item Call register Missed calls Dialled numbers Received calls Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected in the menu Bluetooth User the overview of the stored users New user Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices 1 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system 2 This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system Media player Active device Paired devices Search Phone name the pos
167. e clutch pedal depressed when starting vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox On vehicles with an automatic gearbox place the selector lever in posi tion P or N and depress the brake pedal until the engine starts The engine will not start if the engine is started without the clutch pedal vehi cles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox being depressed The following is displayed in the information display Depress clutch to start or Depress brake to start while the indicator light is lit The following is shown in the information display of the information cluster CLUTCH or BRAKE and the indicator light illuminates simultaneously Petrol engines gt Press and hold the starter button Fig 114 on page 106 until the engine starts Diesel engines gt Press and hold the starter button during the whole preglow period the engine Starts after the indicator light oo has gone out The diesel engine can also be started by pressing the starter button the ignition is switched on and the preglow indicator light oo illuminates Wait until the pre glow indicator light goes out and then press and hold the starter button until the engine Starts If the engine needs to be started quickly in an emergency e g in a critical situa tion the diesel engine can be started by pressing the starter button again before the preglow indicator light goes out Starting off and Driving 107 Emergency start
168. e if gt the tyre inflation pressure is too low gt the structure of the tyre is damaged gt the vehicle is loaded on one side gt the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt snow chains are mounted gt the temporary spare wheel is mounted gt one wheel per axle was changed Basic setting of the system After changing the tyre inflation pressure after changing one or several wheels the position of a wheel on the vehicle e g exchanging the wheels between the axles or when the indicator light lights up while driving a basic setting of the system must be carried out as follows gt Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 188 Service life of tyres gt Switch on the ignition 192 General Maintenance gt Press and hold the button Fig 169 for longer than 2 seconds While pressing the button the indicator light illuminates At the same time the sys tem memory is erased and the new calibration is started which is confirmed with an audible signal and then the indicator light 1 goes out gt If the indicator light does not go out after the basic setting this indicates a system fault Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage The indicator light is lit If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in com parison to the stored basic value the indicator light U E
169. e in the information display If there is no free space available to create a new user profile delete an existing user profile During the connecting procedure no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands free system whereby on ly one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system 1 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connec tion is completed by inputting a code If the authorisation input is required it must always be per formed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection N The visibility of the hands free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes af ter the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile phone has connected to the hands free system Restoring the visibility of the hands free system If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free sys tem within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition the visibility of the hands free system can be reestablished for 3 minutes in the following ways gt By turning the ignition off and on gt By turning voice control off and on gt Via the information display in the menu item Bluetooth Visibility Creating a connection w
170. e indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting up of the indicator light PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF airbag switched off page 153 F WARNING If there is a fault have the airbag system checked immediately by a KODA specialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident Tyre control display 0 The indicator light 4 lights up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres page 188 Service life of tyres If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the system Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 192 Tyre control display Note If the battery has been disconnected the indicator light 1 illuminates after the ignition is switched on The indicator light must go out after driving a short dis tance Windscreen washer fluid level amp If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the indicator light amp comes on Top up with liquid page 182 Windscreen washer system The following is displayed in the information display Top up wash fluid Thickness of brake pads If the indicator light is slit the brake pads are worn The following text will be displayed in the information display Check brake pads Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Turn signal system amp gt Either the left lt or right gt indicator light f
171. e introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 gaged gear A The clock is set with the buttons 3 and 7 Fig 2 on page 8 EA CAUTION Select the display that you wish to change with the button 3 and carry out the The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driving change with the button 7 situations such as overtaking E On vehicles that are fitted with the information display it is also possible to set the clock in the menu Time page 16 Instruments and Indicator Lights 11 Fig 4 Centre console at rear Display B3T 0256 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The time and the outside temperature is displayed on the display in the rear cen tre console when the ignition is switched on Fig 4 The values are taken over by the instrument cluster This chapter contains information on the following subjects Memory Operation Multifunction display details Warning against excessive speeds 12 13 13 15 The multifunction display can only be operated when the ignition is switched on After the ignition is switched on the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition The multifunction display appears in the display Fig 5 on page 12 or in the in formation display page 15 On vehicles with an information display there is an option to fade ou
172. e maximum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10 for every fur ther increase of 1000 m in height The towed weight comprises the actual weight of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device are merely test data for the towing device The vehicle specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents FI warnine f the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum per missible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer are exceeded this can cause accidents and serious injuries a Slipping loads can significantly affect the stability and safety of the vehicle trailer combination causing accidents and serious injuries Towing a trailer Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors The national legal requirements must be observed Headlights The headlight settings must be checked before starting a journey with a coupled trailer If necessary adjust the settings with the headlight beam adjust ment page 53 Headlight beam adjustment 20 Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than the maximum permissible speed indi cated on the trailer Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trail er is d
173. e net partition behind the front seats Fig 79 Pull out the net partition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 79 Pulling out gt Fold the rear seats forward page 71 gt Pull the net partition by the bracket A Fig 79 out of the housing B gt First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it for ward gt In the same way insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle Folding gt First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C Fig 79 gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold the rear seats back into their original position Removing and installing net partition housing Fig 80 Rear seats Net partition hous ing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 79 Removing gt Fold the rear seats forward page 71 gt Open the rear right door gt Push the net partition housing A Fig 80 in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mounts on the rear seats in the direction of the arrow 2 Install gt Insert the recesses on the net partition housing into the mounts on the rear seat backrests gt Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1
174. e only the interface for Bluetooth remains active In this case you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the hands free system deactivate the Bluetooth connection or dial the emergency number 112 only valid in some countries HFP Hands Free Profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HFP profile the telephone continues to use its GMS module and the internal antenna to com municate with the GSM network Note The following guidelines must be observed page 126 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system it is necessary to inter connect the telephone and hands free system Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP function gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the menu Phone New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit code that is shown on the information dis play and confirm it according to
175. e vehicle will lock again auto matically and the safe securing system or anti theft alarm system will be reactiva ted This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally Note Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle If the key which was used to lock the vehicle remains in the vehicle in the area D Fig 13 on page 32 after locking and closing all of the doors including the boot lid the protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle is activated and the vehicle unlocks itself again The following message is displayed in the information display or display of the in strument cluster Key in vehicle or KEY IN VEHICLE Additionally on vehicles which are fitted with the anti theft alarm system an au dible signal sounds Messages in the instrument cluster display Key not found or No Key This message is displayed when you wish to start the engine and the system can not detect a valid key in the vehicle This can occur if the key is outside the vehi cle the battery in the key is discharged the key is defective or the electromag netic field is strongly disturbed This message is also displayed when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running and the system cannot detect a valid key in the vehicle Keyless faulty or CHECK KEYLESS Error in the KESSY system seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Renew key battery or KEY BATTERY Low
176. e wheel R 18 EI warnine a Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged a f the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fit ted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering CAUTION Observe the instructions on the sticker on the temporary spare wheel Note The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times Fullwheeltrim First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Pulling off ings Hl on page 187 gt Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap and detach the cap Fig 167 Pulling off gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the Install wheel trim gt Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the stor age space for the spare wheel E Install gt First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the valve opening provided Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks correctly in place l CAUTION a Use the pres
177. ead and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster 1 Fig 126 P Parklock The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary If you wish to move the selector lever into out of this position the Shiftlock but ton in the selector lever handle and the brake pedal must be actuated at the same time If the battery is used the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P R Reverse gear Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en gine is idling The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be pressed if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R P or N When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R the re verse lights will come on N Neutral The transmission is in Neutral in this position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever out of the position N if the lever is in this position for longer than 2 seconds into the position D or R when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km h or the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched on D Position for driving forward normal programme When the selector lever is in this position the forward gears are automatically shift
178. eadlight flasher are also operated with the turn signal and main beam lever Right gt and left lt turn signal light gt Push the lever upwards A Fig 36 or downwards B gt If you only wish to flash three times the convenience turn signal briefly push the lever to the upper or lower pressure point and release again This fea ture can be activated deactivated via the information display page 16 gt Turn signal for changing lanes to only flash briefly move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position Main beam 20 gt Switch on the low beam 54 Using the system gt Push the lever away from the steering wheel in the direction of arrow spring tensioned position gt The main beam is switched off by pulling the lever towards the steering wheel spring tensioned position in the direction of arrow D Headlight flasher 20 gt Pull the lever towards the steering wheel spring tensioned position in the di rection of arrow D the main beam and indicator light 20 in the instrument cluster come on Parking light P lt Description of the operation page 50 Parking light CAUTION Only use the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled i Note a The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on The cor responding indicator light lt or 9 in the instrument cluster also flashes a The turn signal is automatically ca
179. ect The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant factor Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an unsecured object with a weight of 4 5 kg produces an energy which corresponds to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg You can imagine the injuries that can occur if this object flies through the interior com partment and hits an occupant FJ warnine Store the objects in the boot and attach them to the lashing eyes Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other oncoming traffic This risk is still increased if the objects which are fly ing around are hit by a deployed airbag In this case the objects which are thrown back can injure the occupants hazard a Please note that the handling properties of the vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as the centre of gravity can be displaced risk of accident The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly a f the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with un suitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from being thrown for ward always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly attached to the lashing eyes The items c
180. ecting to the hands free system 129 132 Multifunction display Functions 12 Memory 12 Operation 13 Multimedia 137 AUX IN 138 MDI 138 N Net partition 79 O Oil refer to Engine oil 178 Onboard computer see Multifunction display 12 228 Index Operation in winter De icing windows Diesel fuel Vehicle battery Outside temperature Overview Engine compartment Indicator lights 170 176 185 13 178 18 p Paint see Paint damage Paint damage Panoramic sliding roof Combi Closing Opening Sun screen Parking Park assist Parking aid Parking ticket holder 169 169 45 45 45 113 112 91 Passive Safety Pedals Periodic wiping Petrol refer to Fuel Polishing the paintwork refer to Taking care of your vehicle Power steering Power windows Button in the front passenger door Button in the rear doors 140 112 60 175 169 104 42 42 43 Operational faults Preservation refer to Taking care of your vehicle R Radiator fan 169 181 Radio reception Aerial 170 Functional fault 170 Raise vehicle 199 Rear mirror Automatic dimming interior mirror 63 Exterior mirror 64 Manual dimming interior mirror 63 Rear window heating 58 Recirculated air mode Climatronic 98 Manual air conditioning system 96 Recommended gear 1
181. ed In this case the roof rack system must only be loa ded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions E 82 Using the system This chapter contains information on the following subjects Cup holder in front centre console 8 Cup holder in the rear armrest 83 EI WARNING a Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the elec trical components or seat upholstery a Slide in the cup holder before raising the armrest Fig 82 Front centre console Cup holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Two beverage containers can be placed into the recesses Fig 82 On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders you can cover the cup holder by pulling on the handle A Fig 84 Centre console Ashtray at the front rear Removing the front ashtray insert Fig 83 Rear armrest Cup holder insert cup holder gt Open the ashtray Fig 90 on page 86 7 a gt Grasp the ashtray insert in the area A Fig 84 and remove it in the direction First read a
182. ed ac tion Signals Status Interrupted tone Open using the button on the remote control key or the button on the centre console Fig 22 on page 38 1 continuous tone Force limiter 3 rising tones Confirmation of the storage of the lid position 3 identical tones fault Note The expansion of the area 3 Fig 22 on page 38 changes proportionally de pending on the setting of the top position of the lid page 40 When adjusting the top position of the lid in the area 2 the area 3 is not active the expansion of the area 2 changes proportionally to the set top position of the lid Unlocking andlocking 39 Adjusting the top position of the lid mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 If the space for opening the lid is restricted e g height of garage or for more convenient operation e g according to a person s height it is possible to adjust the top position of the boot lid Adjusting gt Stop the lid in the desired position electrically or manually gt Press the inner button B Fig 21 on page 38 and press and hold it for approx 3 seconds Storing the position in the memory of the control unit is confirmed with an audible signal Deleting the adjusted position gt Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position gt Press and hold the inner button B Fig 21 on page 38 for approx 3 seconds An audible signal sounds and t
183. ed airbags In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel Fig 141 A The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the stowage compartment B Fig 141 If the airbags are deployed the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and infla ted in front of the driver and front passenger Fig 142 D The forward move ment of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make con tact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced Airbag system 149 The airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a controlled manner depending on the load of the particular car occupant in order to cushion head and chest areas The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an extent after an accident to again provide a clear view forward FI WARNING a For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 142 Not maintain ing this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the oc
184. ed up and down in line with the engine load vehicle speed and dynamic shift programme The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever into position D from Nwhen the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km h or is stationary Under certain circumstances e g when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a trailer it may be beneficial to select the manual shift pro gramme page 123 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manual ly to the driving situations S Position for driving forward sports programme Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power po tential of the engine The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds as in the position D The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selec tor lever out of the position D into the position S Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic Fig 127 Selector lever and multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lever or multifunction steering wheel Switching to manual shifting gt Push the selector lever to the right out of position D The selector lever posi tion you have engaged is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear 1 Fig 126 on page 122 on the right
185. edal is released Switching off the cruise control system completely First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 gt Turn the switch A Fig 124 on page 117 into the OFF position START STOP Fig 125 Button for the START STOP sys tem The START STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing harmful exhaust emissions and CO emissions The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on In the start stop mode the engine automatically switches to the vehicle s idle phase e g when stopped at traffic lights 118 Using the system Information regarding the current state of the START STOP system is indicated in the display of the instrument cluster Automatic engine shut down stop phase gt Stop the vehicle where necessary apply the handbrake gt Take the vehicle out of gear gt Release the clutch pedal Automatic renewed engine restart start phase gt Depress the clutch pedal Switching the START STOP system on and off The START STOP system can be switched on off by pressing the button Fig 125 When start stop mode is deactivated the indicator light in the button lights up If the vehicle is in the stop phase when manually switching off the system the engine starts immediately The START STOP system is very complex Some of the procedures are hard to check without servicing The general conditions
186. een or rear window and for the headlight cleaning system The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5 5 litres on vehicles that have a headlight cleaning system Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights We therefore recommend using clean water with a screen cleaner including anti freeze in the winter that is able to remove stubborn dirt Antifreeze should always be added to the cleaning water in the winter even if the vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C CAUTION a Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a f the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid i Note Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when replen ishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be contamina ted which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction CQO Introduction This chapte
187. ehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards CAUTION a Never apply wax to the windows a Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment otherwise the paintwork can be scratched Chrome parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings fj on page 167 First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment otherwise they can be scratched Paint damage First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches scuffs or traces of chip damage must be treated immediately The SKODA Service Partners have a range of matching touch up pens or spray cans available in the colour of your vehicle Note We recommend that any repairs to damaged paintwork are carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Plastic parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Plastic parts can be cleaned using a da
188. elt properly F warnine a The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning a Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into con tact with corrosive liquids such as acids etc a Seat belts which have damage to the webbing connections inertia reel or lock should be replaced by a SKODA specialist garage a Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 173 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 174 Unleaded petrol 175 Diesel fuel 176 The correct type of fuel for your vehicle and the tyre size and inflation pressure are specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 155 on page 174 B E WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehi cle for safety reasons In the event of an accident the canister might be dam aged and fuel may leak out risk of fire CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork risk of paint damage 174 General Maintenance Fig 155 Ri
189. ement of parts a If a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC ASR and EDL also do not work A indicator light page 23 comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system Information on braking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 108 Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted If operated under severe conditions the thickness of the brake pads must be checked by a SKODA specialist garage before the next service appointment Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system If the brake system is not used much or if there is corrosion on the sur face we recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes from a fairly high speed Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be fa
190. en safely 154 Twindoor see Boot lid 36 Two way radio systems 126 Type plate 216 Tyre repair 200 Tyres see Wheels and tyres 189 Index 229 U Underbody protection Unlocking 171 31 Remote control Uphill start assist V Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation Charging Checking the electrolyte level Operation in winter Replacing Safety instructions Vehicle condition see Auto Check Control Vehicle data sticker Vehicle dimensions Vehicle key Vehicle tool kit Visors W Warning symbols see Indicator lights T10 186 185 185 186 182 18 216 218 27 196 58 18 Warning triangle Washing Automatic car wash system by hand Chrome parts High pressure cleaner Weights Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolt Caps Loosening and tightening Wheels 230 Index 195 167 168 168 168 216 199 191 198 187 Wheels and tyres Changing a wheel Full wheel trim General information Handling wheels and tyres new tyres Service life of tyres Snow chains Spare wheel Wheel bolts Winter tyres Window convenience operation Windows De icing See electric power windows Windscreen heating see Radio reception Windscreen washer fluid Checking Indicator light Replenishing Winter Windscreen washer system Windscreen wipers W
191. end the following setting gt Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head C Fig 135 on page 142 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 144 In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated page 152 Deactivating airbags Manual front passenger adjustment page 67 Manually adjusting the front seats Electrical front passenger seat adjustment page 67 Adjusting front seats elec trically Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an ac cident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head C Fig 135 on page 142 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 144 gt Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 154 Transporting children safely Examples of an incorrect seated position First read and observe the introductory information
192. ending on the type and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device Process of connection gt Connect the mobile phone with the hands free system gt Set the access point depending on the operator usually Internet in the menu Phone Settings Data gt Switch on the visibility of the hands free system for the other devices in the menu Phone Bluetooth Visibility gt Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth devi ces gt Select the hands free system as standard SKODA_BT from the list of found devices gt Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instructions given on this device or in the information display gt Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser The operating sys tem requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access de pending on the operator usually 99 Dialogue The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called a dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses gt Avoid a bad pr
193. enger door are opened a When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds a At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption The convenience opening of the windows by means of the key in the driver s lock is only possible within 45 seconds of deactivating or activating the alarm sys tem Window open close HORS Buttons on the driver s door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on Opening gt A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door The opening process stops when one releases the button gt Additionally the window can be opened automatically fully open by pressing the button to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door The closing process stops when one releases the button gt Additionally the window can be closed automatically fully closed by pulling the button to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately The buttons for the individual windo
194. escription of the use refer to the operating instructions for these devices and equipment EJ wAaRNING a f there are passengers on both of the rear seats the DVD player holder must not be used on its own without the DVD player risk of injury a The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three preset positions Be careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely Kp Note Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player hold er DVD player Communication 139 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Safety equipment __ i400 Before setting off 140 What influences the driving safety 141 In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for example regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children It is therefore important in particular to comply with the notes and warnings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you F WARNING This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants You wi
195. etected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by accelerating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Trailer stabilisation The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works in conjunction with the counter steering assistance to reduce the amount the trail er sways After turning on the ignition the ESC indicator light amp in the instru ment cluster lights up for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS indicator light Prerequisites for stabilising the trailer gt The towing device is factory fitted or a compatible towing device has been ret rofitted gt The ESC is active The indicator light 53 or amp in the instrument cluster is not illu minated gt The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket gt The speed is higher than approx 60 km h gt Trailers must have a fixed drawbar gt The ESC works for both braked and unbraked trailers Trailer is connected to the anti theft alarm system gt If the vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and a towing de vice gt If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trail er s
196. ety warn ings H on page 59 Removing the wiper blade gt Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at a right angle to the wiper arm Fig 49 gt Hold the windscreen wiper arm at the top end with one hand gt Unlock the locking button 1 with the other hand and remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 Attaching the wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen Manual dimming interior mirror Basic setting gt Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward Dimming mirror gt Push the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror backwards Automatic dimming interior mirror Fig 50 Automatic dimming interior mir ror Switching on automatic dimming gt Press the button B Fig 50 the indicator light A lights up Switching off automatic dimming gt Press the button B again the indicator light A goes out If the automatic dimming is switched on the mirror dims automatically depend ing on the light striking the mirror from the rear The mirror has no lever on the bottom edge of the mirror After the reverse gear is engaged the mirror always moves back into the normal position Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicinity of the automatic dimming interio
197. event of air transport the Bluetooth function of the hands free sys tem must be switched off by a SKODA specialist garage gil Note a We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two way radio sys tems in a vehicle be carried out by a KODA Service Partner Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth communication are compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III Ask a KODA Serv ice Partner to find out if your phone is compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM Ill The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restricted to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obstacles be tween the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile phone is in a jacket pocket for example this can lead to difficulties when estab lishing a connection with the hands free system or transferring data Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel Fig 129 Multifunction steering wheel Control buttons for the telephone Button Action Press briefly The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the tele phone Fig 129 This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal telephone preinst
198. f rotation is cor rect page 190 Do it yourself 197 Subsequent steps First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 196 The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special screw page 190 gt Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible gt Change the damaged wheel or consult a SKODA specialist garage about repair possibilities a f it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing the wheel the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque a Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked Loosening and tightening wheel bolts Fig 173 Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 196 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 199 198 Do it yourself Loosening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the left Fig 173 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto t
199. for the proper functioning of the START STOP system are listed in the following overview Conditions for the automatic engine shut down stop phase gt The gearshift lever is in Neutral gt The clutch pedal is not depressed gt The driver has fastened the seat belt gt The driver s door is closed gt The bonnet is closed gt The vehicle is at a standstill gt The factory fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer gt The engine is at operating temperature gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient gt The stationary vehicle is not on a steep slope or a steep downhill section gt The engine speed is less than 1 200 rpm gt The temperature inside the vehicle battery is not too low or too high gt There is sufficient pressure in the braking system gt The difference between the outdoor and the set temperature in the interior is not too great gt The vehicle speed since the last time the engine was switched off was greater than 3 km h gt No cleaning of the diesel particle filter takes place page 24 gt The front wheels are not turned excessively the steering angle is less than 3 4 of a steering wheel revolution Conditions for an automatic restart start phase gt The clutch pedal is depressed gt The max min temperature is set gt The defrost function for the windscreen is switched on gt A high blower stage has been selected gt The STA
200. frontal collision gt gt Fastening and unfastening seat belts 146 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats 147 Belttensioners CAA Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ac cident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated posi tion Fig 136 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable ex tent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well result in severe injuries The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally ab sorbed by the belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other pas sive safety measures such as the airbag system also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of in jury 144 Safety Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the ve hicle page 154 Transporting children safely EI warnine a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the people seated at the rear risk of injury Expectant women must also always wear a Seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protectio
201. g 19 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Closing ings H on page 35 gt Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing The boot lid can be unlocked manually if there is a fault in the central locking sys A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the no boot lid Unlocking gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 71 Folding the seat backrest for wards gt Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the stop Fig 20 l A First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn gt Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow ings H on page 35 gt Open the boot lid If the vehicle was locked with the button 8 on the remote control key before the Unlocking Combi boot lid was closed the lid is automatically locked as soon as it is closed gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 71 Folding the seat backrest for The delayed automatic locking function of the boot lid can be activated on your wards a a i A E EAEN EEE vehicle The following applies following activation of this function If the boot lid J pia eta oe he eel Le ie OS OPE ee EEE was locked with the button 5 on the remote control key 2 page 31 then it is 9 p oe laa a as it ae possible to open the lid within a limited period of it being closed gt Unlock the lid upwards in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Open the boot li
202. g system or the ABS system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident Seat belt indicator light 4 The indicator light 4 comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt The indicator light only goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt 20 Using the system If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger a perma nent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km h and simulta neously the indicator light A flashes If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90 seconds the warning signal is deactivated and the indicator light A lights up permanently Dynamo t If the indicator light lights up amp when the engine is running the vehicle battery is not being charged Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage The electrical system requires check ing EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Switches for the hazard warning light system CAUTION If the indicator light cooling system fault comes on in addition to the indicator light amp when driving stop the vehicle immediately and switch the engine off risk of engine damage Open door The indicator light comes on if one
203. g the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap page 206 Vehicles a towing device CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 204 On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap 206 Do it yourself Use the detachable ball rod for towing For installing the detachable ball rod see the instructions manual for the towing device Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to us ing the towing eye If the towing device is removed completely it must be replaced with the standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the towing eye If this procedure is not observed the vehicle may not meet the national legal pro visions CAUTION The detachable ball rod and the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used i Note The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing if necessary Introduc
204. ger door must be closed when locking Do not grab the door handle otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked If the vehicle is fitted with the electric boot lid the lid starts to open after press ing the handle After the boot lid is closed it will be locked On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox the selector lever must be moved into the position P before unlocking Check locking After locking the vehicle by means of the sensor 1 Fig 13 it is not possible to unlock the vehicle using the sensor 2 for 2 seconds Pull on the handle to check if the vehicle is locked CAUTION After leaving the vehicle it does not lock automatically the procedure for locking the vehicle must therefore be observed as a f the battery in the remote control key is weak or discharged the vehicle may not be unlocked or locked via the KESSY system In this case use the emergency unlocking or emergency locking of the driver s door page 35 a The KESSY system can find the valid key even if it was left in the front area of the vehicle s roof for example Make sure you know where the valid remote con trol key is at all times a When locking unlocking the vehicle using the sensors 1 Fig 13 or 2 do not use gloves or other objects that might prevent the hand from coming into direct contact with the sensor a If you unlock the vehicle by means of the sensor in the handle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds th
205. gher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power in crease or a lower fuel consumption On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating91 RON of unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available The journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a minimum engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Fuel additives Only use unleaded petrol which complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 98 RON as these meet all of the requirements for fault free engine operation We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used CAUTION a All KODA vehicles with petrol engines must only be operated with
206. ght rear side of the vehicle Open fuel filler flap fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 174 The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked with the central locking Open fuel filler flap gt Press in the middle of the left area of the fuel filler flap Fig 155 A gt Unscrew the filler cap by turning it to the left and place the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap Fig 155 B Closing the filler cap gt Turn the filler cap to the right until it clicks into place gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly CAUTION Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system aux iliary heating and ventilation The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue filling the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up i Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres containing a reserve of approx 10 5 litres Unleaded petrol First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 174 Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded fuel that complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN
207. ghter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for electrical ap pliances page 84 12 volt power socket Further information page 194 Accessories changes and replacement of parts 84 Using the system 12 volt power socket Fig 86 Boot Power socket boot Power socket Combi Overview of the 12 volt power socket In the front centre console A Fig 85 on page 84 In the rear centre console B Fig 85 on page 84 In the boot Fig 86 Using the power socket gt Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter or open the cover for the power socket gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket Further information page 194 Accessories changes and replacement of parts E WARNING Improper use of the 12 volt power socket and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The 12 volt power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn a If the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately CAUTION a Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s elec trical system can be damaged a Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle risk of battery draining a Only use ma
208. gt Turn the bulb 5 in an anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove In sert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop Fuses and light bulbs 213 Tail light Combi Fig 191 Installing a tail light Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 Overview of the location of the bulbs Fig 191 1 Parking light rear fog light 2 Reversing light 3 Turn signal lights 4 Parking lights Brake light 5 parking lights Removing and installing the tail light gt Open the boot lid gt Remove the plug Fig 191 and unscrew the tail light with a torx wrench page 196 Vehicle tool kit gt Carefully remove the light Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the bodywork gt To re install the tail light first of all guide it with the openings A f Fig 191 on to the bolts on the bodywork gt Carefully press the tail light onto the bodywork until it clicks into place gt Screw the tail light into place and push in the plugs Changing bulbs 1 3 and 5 gt Turn the bulb holder anti clockwise up to the stop and remove it from the housing gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new bulb 214 Do it yourself gt Insert the holder with the new bulb into the housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop Changing bulbs 2 and 4 gt Turn the bulb holder
209. h exceeded during the parking procedure gt Time limit of 180 seconds for the parking procedure exceeded gt Button for the park assist system pressed gt Parking aid activated gt TCS system switched off gt Automatic steering procedure interrupted by the driver stopping the steering wheel gt Reverse gear disengaged or selector lever removed from the position R when reversing into the parking space Starting off and Driving 115 Messages in the information display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 Park Assist finished The parking procedure has ended or after switching on the ignition the vehicle has not been driven above 10 km h Park Assist Speed too high Reduce the speed to below 30 km h Driver steering intervention Please take over steering The parking procedure is terminated due to driver intervention Park Assist finished ASR deactivated The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the TCS system is switched off ASR deactivated Please take over steering The parking procedure was ended because the TCS system was switched off dur ing the parking procedure Trailer Park Assist finished The parking procedure is not possible because the trailer is hitched and a plug is inserted in the socket of the towing device Time limit exceeded Please take over steering The parking procedure was ended because a time limit of 180 seconds for
210. harge status of the phone battery Valid for GSM II GSM III Signal strength GSM II GSM III a phone is connected to the hands free system GSM II GSM Ill when connected via the HFP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM II GSM Ill when connected via the HFP profile a phone is connected to the hands free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile A multimedia unit is connected to the hands free system GSM II GSM III A UMTS network is available GSM Ill Internet connection via the hands free system a This function is only supported by some mobile phones Phone Phonebook A phone phonebook is part of the hands free system This phone phonebook can be used depending on the type of mobile phone After the first connection of the telephone the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands free system an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this time the phone book which was stored after the last update was completed is available Newly stored telephone numbers are on ly shown after the updating has ended The update is interrupted if a telephone event e g
211. has been disconnected and reconnected the indicator light 5 comes on after switching on the ignition The indicator light should go out after driving a short distance Antilock brake system ABS If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the ABS The following is displayed in the information display Error ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EJ warnine a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 a If the indicator light page 20 is displayed simultaneously with indicator light do not continue your journey Seek help from a KODA specialist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident The rear fog light 0 The indicator light 0 comes on when the rear fog lights are operat ing page 52 Bulb failure The indicator light comes on if a bulb is faulty gt within a few seconds of the ignition being switched on gt when switching on the defective light bulb The following is displayed in the information display Check front right dipped beam Adaptive headlights If the indicator light flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on the ignition there is a problem with the
212. he air conditioning system economically The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte rior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to al low the heated air to escape The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window iS open If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected SA For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also reduced when fuel is saved Operational problems If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 207 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 9 If you cannot rectify the functional fault yourself or the cooling capacity decrea ses the cooling system must be switched off Visit a SKODA specialist garage The air conditioning system 93 Air outlet vents B3T 0510 Fig 107 Air vents at the rear Opening gt Turn the rotary knob into the position 29 Closing gt Turn the rotary knob into the position O
213. he chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be positioned across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 139 2 Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of en suring optimal protection for the unborn child On expectant mothers the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen Fig 139 D Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 138 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist Belt inertia reel Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel This inertia reel offers you com plete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly If the brakes are ap plied suddenly the inertia reel will block The belts also block when the car accel erates when driving downhill and when cornering CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not damage the door trim or other parts of the interior Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats Fig 140 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 144 The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust
214. he height which was originally set is deleted from the memory of the control unit while the basic position of the top lid position is again set Note a The lid always opens at the height which was last stored in the memory of the control unit a The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically is always lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is opened manually Operational problems Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the boot lid is open it is necessary to activate the electric boot lid system Activation refers to the initiali sation of the control unit by manually closing the lid Thus the end position of the lid is stored under fully closed in secured lock Possible malfunctions of the electric boot lid 40 Using the system Examples of operational malfunctions Description of the malfunc Possible solutions tion The lid cannot be lifted out of Emergency unlocking of the lid page 37 the lock Remove the possible obstacle e g snow open The lid does not react to an the lid again page 39 opening signal Press the handle on the lower edge of the boot lid and pull the lid upwards The lid remains in the top po Manually close the lid slowly and without sud sition den movements CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the follow
215. he key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is with drawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The following is displayed in the information display Immobilizer active Fig M3 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 Petrol engines 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Diesel engines 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switched off the steer ing can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starting engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and the key cannot or can only be turned with difficulty into the position 2 Fig 113 move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock E First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The pre glow indicator light 7 comes on after the ignition has been switched on The en gine should be started immediately after the preglow indicator light goes out You should not switch on any major ele
216. he parking aid to operate properly a f the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in the position P the warning signal is interrupted the vehicle cannot move CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Park assist display on the information display 114 Parking with the help of the park assist system and completing the parking procedure 115 Messages in the information display 116 The parking aid is part of the park assist system therefore the information and safety guidelines page 112 Parking aid must be read and observed The park assist system helps you to park in a suitable parallel parking space be tween two vehicles or behind a vehicle After switching on the ignition and when driving at a speed of up to 30 km h the park assist system automatically searches for suitable parking spaces on the driv er s and passenger s side of the vehicle During the parking procedure the park assist only takes over the steering move ments the pedals continue to be operated by the driver If the park assist system is switched on a yellow indicator light illuminates up in the button Fig 121 on page 114 The function of the system is based on gt the measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving gt the determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking gt the calculation of the line on which the vehi
217. he wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight EI warnine Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn as long as the vehicle has not yet been jacked up risk of an accident If it proves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foodt Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make sure you keep your footing Raising the vehicle Fig 174 Changing a wheel Jacking points for positioning lifting jack Fig 175 Attach lifting jack First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 196 Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point that is closest to the faulty wheel Fig 174 The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill gt Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill gt Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web Fig 175 B below the embossing in the side surface of the lower sill gt Ensure that the entire surface of the lifting jack base plate rests on level ground and is located in a vertical position to the area Fig 175 where the claw grasps the web gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground Securing wheels against theft Fig 176 P
218. hen the engine is run ning 58 Using the system The windscreen and rear window heater automatically switches off after approxi mately 10 minutes SA For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel econ omy page 161 Saving electricity i Note a If the on board voltage drops the windscreen and rear window heater switches off automatically to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine con trol page 186 Automatic load deactivation The position and shape of the switch for the rear window heater can vary de pending on the equipment installed in the vehicle Sun visors Fig 44 Sun visor double sun visor The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 44 The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers Push the cover open in the direction of the arrow 2 When you slide open the cover the vanity mirror lighting in the headliner switches on automatically It switches off again when you slide the cover closed or when you raise the sun visor On vehicles that are equipped with a double sun visor the auxiliary visor can be unfolded in the direction of the arrow 3 after swivelling the sun visor towards the door E WARNING The sun visors must n
219. his is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre valve The same also applies to the replacement valve core 1 B31 0530 Preparing to use the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 200 The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit gt In the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 200 gt If a trailer is connected remove it gt Remove the breakdown kit from the boot gt Stick the sticker 2 Fig 177 on page 201 on the dash panel in view of the driv er gt Do not remove the foreign body e g screw or nail from the tyre gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean sur face rag paper etc Sealing and inflating tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on pag
220. hort time or if it drops below the MIN marking If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the indicator light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 20 Brake system FJ warninec If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking do not continue your journey risk of accident Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Inspecting and replenishing 181 Changing the brake fluid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system The water content also lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50114 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 EI warnine Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system This greatly impairs the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle CAUTION Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle Windscreen washer system Fig 161 Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 182 General Maintenance The windscreen washer fluid reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the wind scr
221. icates the total distance in kilometres or miles which the vehicle has been driven Fault display If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear continuously in the display Ensure the fault is rectified as soon as possible by SKODA a specialist ga rage Note For vehicles fitted with the information display if the display of the second speed is activated in mph or km h this driving speed is indicated instead of the counter for the total distance driven Service Interval Display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 10 Using the system Service Interval Display Before the next service interval a key symbol lt and the remaining kilometres are indicated on the display for several seconds after switching on the ignition At the same time the remaining days until the next service interval are displayed The following is displayed in the information display Service in km or days The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or where applicable days until the service due date is reached As soon as the due date for the service is reached a flashing key symbol lt and the text Service appears in the display for several seconds after the ignition has been switched on The following is displayed in the information display Service now Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can use the button
222. ice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands CALL XYZ This command calls up the contact from the phone book PHONE BOOK After this command for example the phone book can be repeated back to you a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc CALL HISTORY Lists of dialled numbers missed calls etc DIAL NUMBER After this command a telephone number can be en tered to establish a connection with the requested party REDIAL After this command the system calls the last dialled number MUSIC Play music from the mobile phone or another paired device FURTHER OPTIONS After this command the system offers additional context dependent commands SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc CANCEL 4 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi The dialogue is ended gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system If a voice command is not detected the system answers with Sorry and a new entry can be completed After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid After the 3rd error the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice entry fo
223. iding roof are properly closed to ensure the full functionality of the anti theft alarm system a Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of the radio remote control from other vehicles 34 Using the system Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring Fig 14 Button for interior monitor and towing protection monitoring The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the alarm Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the driver door gt Press the button sz Fig 14 on the centre column on the driver side the sym bol that lights up in the button changes from red to orange gt Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again automatically the next time the car is locked Eii Note a Switch off the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring if there is a possibility of the alarm being triggered by movements from e g children or ani mals within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by train or ship or towed The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in terior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle After closing the door it no longer be opened from the outside The door can be unlocked f
224. ies or bruises as a re sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention As the electric front seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switch ed off even when the ignition key is withdrawn never leave children unat tended in the car The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle 66 Using the system I WARNING Continued a Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Children must be fastened page 154 Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system a The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats This is particularly important for the front seat passenger You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position a t is important for the driver and front passenger t
225. ights illuminate E First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Switching on ings H on page 48 J gt First of all turn the light switch to position or z0 Fig 32 on page 52 Switching on gt Pull the light switch to position 2 gt First of all turn the light switch to position or 20 Fig 32 The indicator light 0 illuminates in the instrument cluster when the rear fog gt Pull the light switch to position 1 lights are switched on page 18 The indicator light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory fitted switched on page 18 towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer and the rear fog lights switched on a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The fog lights with the function CORNER are designed to improve the illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when turning parking etc The fog lights with the function CORNER are adjusted according to the steering angle or after switching on the turn signal light in the following circumstances gt the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of maximum 40 km h gt the daylight drivi
226. ilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof ensure that the opened sliding tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clear ances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load SA For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption Seats and Stowage 81 Fig 81 Attachment points for roof bars First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 81 Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the enclosed instructions i Note The figure only applies to Combi vehicles E First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 81 The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 100 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is us
227. in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat gt Switch off the front passenger airbag page 152 Deactivating airbags gt Slide the front passenger seat all the way back gt Move the front passenger seat backrest into the vertical position gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Adjust the seat belt for the front passenger seat so that it is as high as possible not suitable for a child seat fastened with the ISOFIX system gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer s user manual of the child seat EJ WARNING a It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attach ing a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel page 152 Deactivating airbags a Never use a child safety seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat if the airbag is switched on This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front pas senger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed a This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the B column on the front passenger side Fig 147 The sticker is visible upon opening th
228. in the button go out EJ warninec Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Note a If the windscreen mists up press the button 1 Fig 109 on page 97 Press the button when the windscreen is demisted a The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature is higher than approx 2 C Controlling blower The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature However the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular needs gt Repeatedly press the button 10 Fig 109 on page 97 on the left side re duce blower speed or on the right side increase blower speed If the blower is switched off the Climatronic system is switched off The set blower speed is displayed above the button when the respective num ber of indicator lights come on EJ warninc a Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary a Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist u
229. indicates the relevant open door or boot bonnet An audible signal also sounds if the vehicle is travelling at more than 6 km h Auto Check Control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 Vehicle condition Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked contin uously when the ignition is switched on and also while driving Some error messages and other information are displayed in the information dis play The messages are displayed at the same time as the symbols in the informa tion display or the indicator lights in the instrument cluster page 18 If there is at least one error message the menu item Vehicle status is displayed in the menu After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is dis played Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e g 1 3 This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being dis played Warning symbols Engine oil pressure too low page 21 Clutches of the automatic gearbox are too hot Check engine oil level engine oil sensor faulty page 18 page 22 Thickness of brake pads page 25 Problem with engine oil pressure page 18 18 Using the system Clutches of the automatic gearbox are too hot lt i A symbol lt 3 in the information display indicates that the temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox is too high
230. indscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor a If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures be tween the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again a Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a f the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen a Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons These can be purchased from a SKODA Service Partner a The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms are fol ded out The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while do ing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet 60 Using the system a If the slower 2 Fig 47 on page 60 or the faster 3 wiper setting is switched on and the vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km h the lower wiper step is switched on automatically At a speed increase of more than 8 km h the previous wiper setting is established again a f there is an obstacle on the windscreen the wiper will try to push away the obstacle If the obstacle conti
231. indscreen wiper Automatic rear window wiper Combi Replacing the rear window wiper blade Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Windscreen wipers Activating Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades Windscreen washer fluid Winter operation Snow chains Winter tyres see Wheels and tyres 196 191 187 189 189 193 190 193 42 170 40 58 170 182 182 182 182 60 61 62 60 182 193 193 SKODA pursues a policy of constant product and model development We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The information about appear ance performances dimensions weight standards and functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication Certain items of equipment might only be in Stalled at a later date information provided by your local SKODA Service Partner or are only offered in particular markets It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner s Manual Reprinting reproduction or translation either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA SKODA expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws Subject to change Issued by KODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s 2012 Minimisation of fuel consumption and CO emissions Recyclability Start stop system All models currently in production h
232. ine and manual transmission in the low rev range If you fail to do so the functionality of the brake booster can be impaired risk of accident a f a front spoiler full wheel trim etc is mounted retrospectively it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced Other wise the functionality of the brake system could be impaired risk of acci dent a Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system risk of accident a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The children might for ex ample release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The vehicle might then move off risk of accident a A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then be without function risk of acci dent a Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety offered by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of an accident The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault Visit a SKODA specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the dam age is and the limitati
233. ing and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault free Operation Operating measure Electrical power window operational faults page 43 Panoramic sliding roof operational faults page 46 User manual of the radio or user manual of the navigation system Enter the radio navigation system code num ber Setting the clock page 11 Data in the multifunction display are deleted page 12 Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a SKODA Service Partner to ensure the full functionality of all electrical systems Replacing the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 182 186 General Maintenance When replacing a battery the new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage amperage and be the same size Suitable types of vehicle batteries can be purchased from a SKODA Service Partner We recommend that the battery is replaced by a SKODA Service Partner where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be disposed of in accordance with national regulations Automatic load deactivation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 An intelligent vehicle power management system automatically takes various measures at high loads on the vehicle battery to
234. ing subjects Window open close 41 Window in the front passenger door and the rear doors open close _ 42 Force limiter of the power windows 42 Window convenience operation 42 Operational faults 43 EI WwARNING a f the vehicle is locked from the outside do not leave anybody in the vehicle as it is not possible to open the windows from the inside in the event of an emergency a The system is fitted with a force limiter page 42 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centi metres The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully Otherwise these can cause severe crushing injuries a t is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors safety pushbutton S Fig 23 on page 41 when children are being transported on the rear seats CAUTION a Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric win dows a In the event that the windows are frozen first of all eliminate the ice page 170 De icing windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the power windows otherwise the power window mechanism could be damaged a When leaving the locked vehicle make sure that the windows are closed at all times a Note a After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the windows for approx 10 minutes The power windows are only switched off completely once the driver or front pass
235. injuries Side airbags Fig 144 Location of the side airbag in the driver s seat gas filled side air bags In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the ve hicle The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats Fig 144 A The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat back rest When the side airbags Fig 144 B are deployed the head airbag and belt ten sioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated air bag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pelvis is reduced on the side facing the door EJ warnine a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat page 155 Child safety and side airbag There must not be any further persons animals as well as objects posi tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No ac cessories such as cup holders should be attached to the doors BE WARNING Continued a f children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelli
236. ion Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position D Fig 25 on page 43 Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Fig 25 on page 43 Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter If an obstacle e g ice pre vents closing the sliding tilting roof stops and opens completely The sliding tilt ing roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by turning the switch into position A Fig 25 on page 43 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding tilting roof to close completely H When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is much less The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open F warnine Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury Unlocking and locking 43 CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism and seal An open sliding tilting roof can also be closed from the outside gt Press and hold the lock button 8 on the remote control key or hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the lock position or with the KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor 1 Fig 13 on page 32 H The closing operation stops immediately when you release the key or the lock button E WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof
237. ion also applies Do not drive at an engine speed that is too low Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Observe the recommended gear page 11 Recom mended gear 158 Driving Tips CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is Stationary or when driving in individual gears SA For the sake of the environment Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels and protects the environment New tyres New tyres have to be run in since they do not offer optimal grip at first Drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so New brake pads New brake pads initially do not provide full braking efficiency The brake pads must initially be run in Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or so Catalytic converter Proper operation of the emission control system catalytic converter is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally conscious way The following guidelines must be observed gt Vehicles fitted with a petrol engine must always be refueled with unleaded pet rol page 175 Unleaded petrol gt Do not pour too much oil into the engine page 178 Checking the engine oil level gt Do not switch off the ig
238. ion and complete the adjust ment of the seat m Seats and Stowage 67 Memory function of the power seat Fig 35 Memory buttons and SET button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 66 The memory function for the driver s seat provides the option to store the individ ual positions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors Each of the three mem ory buttons B Fig 55 can be assigned a set position Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward gt Switch on the ignition gt Adjust the seat to the desired position gt Adjust both of the exterior mirrors page 64 gt Press the button A Fig 55 gt Within ae after pressing the button press the desired memory button B An acknowledgment sound confirms the storage in the seat memory Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the required memory button B Fig 55 gt Move the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control into position R page 64 gt Engage reverse gear gt Adjust the right exterior mirror to the desired position page 64 gt Take the vehicle out of gear The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the seat memory Retrieving the saved setting The retrieval is possible when turned the ignition is switched on and the vehicle speed is less than 5 km h or when the ignition key is inserted in the ig
239. ion lock until the vehicle has come to a stop The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk of accident CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and igni tion lock i Note If you lose a key please contact a KODA Service Partner who will obtain a re placement key for you Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 9 Remote control key Remove cover remove battery Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover Fig 9 If the battery is discharged the red indicator light A does not flash after you press a button on the remote control key Fig 8 on page 27 We recom mend that you ask a KODA Service Partner to replace the key battery However if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as follows gt Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of arrows 1 Fig 9 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down wards in the region of arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery Ensure that the symbol on the battery is facing up wards The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover gt Place
240. ir conditioning system Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning sys tem for the respective operating modes Setting of the control dial Button Air outlet vents 2 A BWH A al Defrost defog windscreen and Desired tempera Automatically Open and align with the side side windows ture switched on window Do not switch on To the right up to The fastest heating the stop Switched off Briefly switch on Opening Desired tempera Comfortable heating e 2or3 Switched off Do not switch on Opening To the left up to briefly 4 then The fastest cooling the stop gt or3 Activated Briefly switch on Opening Desired tempera ture To the left up to the stop Optimal cooling 20r3 Activated Do not switch on Open and align to the roof Fresh air mode ventilation Desired position Switched off Do not switch on Opening 8 We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside Note Switching off gt Press the button s again the indicator light in the button goes out Controls A B C and the button 1 and 4 Fig 108 on page 95 a Air outlet vents 2 Fig 106 on page 94 a We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 106 on page 94 in the opened position Recirculated air mode is switched off auto
241. ir conditioning system 93 B Brake fluid 181 Air outlet vents 94 Breakdown kit 200 Climatronic 97 Before setting off 140 Bulbs Manual air conditioning system 94 Belt tensioners 147 Replacing 210 Alarm 33 Bonnet Button in the driver s door Anti theft alarm system 33 Closing 177 Electric power windows 40 Antilock brake system 11 Opening 177 Armrest Warning light 21 C Front 883 Boot resi 72 88 Class N1 vehicles 73 Car computer Ashtray 83 Cover l 75 see Multifunction display 12 Assist systems emergency me Combi Car jack 196 ABS a oe 37 Carrier 81 Cruise control systems CCS 116 E EVA E AE one Catalytic converter 158 Fastening elements 74 EDL m Fixing nets z4 CD changer 138 ESC 22 110 Central locking button 30 Index 225 Central locking system 28 Changes 194 Changing Engine oil 179 Wheel 196 Charging a vehicle battery 185 Checking Battery electrolyte level 185 Brake fluid 181 Coolant level 180 Engine oil 178 Oil level 178 Windscreen washer fluid 182 Children and safety 154 Child safety Side airbag 155 Child safety lock 28 Child seat Classification 155 ISOFIX 156 on the front passenger seat 154 Suitability 156 TOP TETHER 156 Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle 169 Cigarette lighter 84 Cleaning 167 Artificial leather 172 Headlight lenses 170 Material coverings 172 Materials 172 Natural leather 172 Plastic parts 169 Wheels 171 Clock 11 Clothes
242. ironment a Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high lubricity oils a Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a SKODA specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor Note We recommend that your vehicle is serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA Serv ice Partner Avoid short distances 1 100km higaias Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures 15 25 30 Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start Fuel consump tion drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating tempera ture An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The im age Fig 153 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a cer tain distance at a temperature of 20 C and a temperature of 10 C Your vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in the winter than in the summer Checking tyre inflation pressures Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct The rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low This will not
243. irst read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 The cooling system is filled with a coolant in the factory The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive of 40 This mixture provides antifreeze protection down to 25 C and also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion It also prevents the formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant The concentration of coolant must therefore not be reduced by adding water dur ing the summer months or in countries with a warm climate The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least 40 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons the amount of coolant additive can only be increased up to 60 antifreeze protection down to approx 40 C The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 When refilling we only recommend you use the same antifreeze written on the antifreeze expansion tank Fig 159 on page 180 Inspecting and replenishing 179 Coolant capacity Capacities in litres 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI 1 8 Itr T12 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI 3 6 1 191 kW FSI
244. itch positions are identical however The low beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the position z0 or AUTO After switching off the ignition the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on The side lights also go out after the ignition key is removed 48 Using the system EI warnine a Never drive with only the side lights on The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other oncoming traffic Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor The automatic driving lamp control AUTO only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and if necessa ry to switch on the light depending on the light conditions The light sensor cannot for example detect rain or snow Under these conditions we recom mend switching on the low beam or fog lights CAUTION The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with na tional legal requirements The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights E Note a If the light switch is in the position the ignition key is removed and the driv er s door is open an audible warning signal will sound The audible warning signal is switched off by means of the door contact when the driver s door is closed ig nition off howeve
245. ith an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on your mobile phone if the automatic connection has been established Disconnecting the connection gt By withdrawing the ignition key gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the information display in the menu Bluetooth User Solving connection problems If the system announces No paired phone found check the operating state of the mobile phone gt Is the mobile phone switched on gt Is the PIN code entered gt Is Bluetooth active gt Is the visibility of the mobile phone active gt Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands free system Communication 129 i Note a f a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone only use your mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum a Placing the mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount en sures optimum sending and receiving power Inserting the mobile phone and adapter Fig 130 Universal telephone preinstalla tion Only one telephone mount is factory fitted An adapter for the mobile phone can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories Inserting the adapter and mobile phone gt First of all push the adapter A in the direction
246. kg 0 up to 13kg up to 9 months up to 18 months Transporting children safely 155 Weight of the child 9 18 kg Approximate age up to 4 years 15 25 kg up to 7 years 22 36 kg over 7 years Suitability of child seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 154 Overview of the suitability of child seats according to the standard ECE R 44 Child seat type Front passenger seat u Seat Rear seat outside u T Rear seat middle u T U Universal category a child seat with the word UNIVERSAL which is de signed for fastening on the seat with the seat belt ISOFIX a child seat which is designed for fastening on the seat with eyelets for the ISOFIX system is provided page 156 Child seats with the ISOFIX system ISOFIX a child seat which is designed for fastening on the seat with an eye let for the TOP TETHER system is provided page 156 Child seat with the TOP TETHER system Child seats with the ISOFIX system Fig 149 Rear seat ISOFIX 156 Safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 154 There are two fixing eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place On the rear outside seats the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery The places are marked with labels with the ISO
247. lashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever If a turn signal light fails the indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate Switching off the hazard indicator light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash Further information page 54 Turn signal and main beam lever Low beam 20 The indicator light 20 comes on when low beam is selected page 49 Instruments and Indicator Lights 25 The indicator light comes on when the fog lights are operating page 52 The indicator light comes on when the cruise control is operating page 116 m If the indicator light lights up operate the brake pedal This is necessary to move the selector lever from position P and N page 124 or to start the engine in vehicles with the KESSY system page 107 B The indicator light comes on when the main beam or headlight flasher are se lected page 54 5 26 Using the system Introductory information Fig 8 Remote control key Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle Fig 8 EJ WARNING a Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle even if it is only for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignit
248. lease the lever The washer system stops and the wiper continues for anoth er 2 to 3 wiper strokes depending on the duration of the spraying process The lever will stay in position after releasing it 6 Switching windscreen wipers off gt Move the lever back into the home position 0 Fig 47 Winter position If the windscreen wipers are in rest position they cannot be folded out from the windscreen For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily This rest position is set as follows gt Switch on the windscreen wipers gt Switch off the ignition The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when switching off the ignition The service position can also be used as a winter position page 62 Automatic rear window wiper Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 If the windscreen wiper is in position 2 Fig 47 on page 60 or 3 the rear win dow is wiped every 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle s speed exceeds 5 km h When the rain sensor is active the lever is in the position 1 the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in continuous mode no break between each wiping process Activation deactivation The function of the automatic rear window wiper is activated deactivated in the information display in the menu Settings Lights amp
249. lectric lid CAUTION a In a critical situation the movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick force against the lid Before opening or closing the lid check if there are any objects in the opening or closing range which could obstruct the movement e g a load on the roof lug gage rack or on the trailer etc risk of causing damage to the lid a Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened boot lid e g distance from the garage ceiling Otherwise it may happen that the clearance above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load e g after unloading risk of causing damage to the lid a Do not try to manually close the lid during the electric closing process Damage can occur to the system of the electric boot lid a If the lid is closed manually it must be ensured that when moving the lid into the lock pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the SKODA logo i Note a In certain circumstances if the lid is loaded e g by a thick layer of snow the opening process of the lid can be interrupted The lid must be protected to ensure its electrical functionality a If necessary we recommend that you ask a SKODA Service Partner Description of the operation AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 When operating the lid the system distinguishes 3 areas Fig 22 on page 38 where the function of
250. lights up The indicator light flashes i If the indicator light flashes there is a system fault Seek help from a SKODA spe cialist garage to correct the fault EI warnine a When the indicator light illuminates immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure a Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the indicator light can be delayed or does not light up at all The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure For this reason the tyre inflation pressure must be checked regularly a The tyre control display does therefore not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control as the system cannot detect an even loss of pressure a The tyre control display cannot provide a warning in the event of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss e g in the case of sudden tyre damage In this case care fully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking a To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display it is necessary to re peat the basic setting every 10 000 km or once a year Wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of de
251. lish the function gt switch on the ignition gt pull the top edge of the button to close the window gt release the button gt pull the relevant button upwards again for approx 3 seconds Operation in winter In the winter ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause there to be more resistance when closing the window The window will stop and move back several centimetres It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window page 42 Introductory information Fig 25 Control dial for the power slid ing tilting roof The sliding tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial Fig 25 and only functions when the ignition is switched on The control dial has several positions The sliding tilting roof can still be opened closed and tilted for approx 10 mi nutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as one of the front doors is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof Aid Note If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the slid ing tilting roof does not close fully This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch position A Fig 25 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds Using the system Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 25 on page 43 Opening fully gt Turn the switch to position B Fig 25 on page 43 and hold it in this position spring tensioned posit
252. ll find further information on safety which concerns you and those travelling with you in the following chapters of this Owner s Manual The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This ap plies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle Safety equipment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 140 The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle gt three point seat belts for all the seats gt belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats 140 Safety gt belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats gt seat belt height adjusters for front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger gt driver s knee airbag gt front side airbags gt rear side airbags gt head airbags gt anchoring points for child seat using the ISOFIX system gt anchoring points for child seat using the TOP TETHER system gt head restraints adjustable for height gt adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used Before setting off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn i
253. lure of the power steer ing and the steering forces can be greater Seek help from a SKODA specialist ga rage Instruments and Indicator Lights 21 If the indicator light lights up this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the steering assist has failed significantly higher steering forces Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Steering lock KESSY system gt While the indicator light is flashing the steering lock cannot be released Fur ther information page 105 KESSY system gt As long as the indicator light is flashing an audible signal is beeping and the following appears in the information display Steering column lock Workshop the electrical steering lock is faulty Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage gt As long as the indicator light is flashing an audible signal is beeping and the following appears in the information display Steering column lock faulty the electrical steering lock is faulty Park the car do not continue the journey Af ter switching off the ignition it is then no longer possible to lock the steering to activate the electrical components e g radio navigation system to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system
254. m The safe securing system and anti theft alarm system correspond to vehicles without the KESSY system Only the control elements are different When unlocking and locking the vehicle or for starting the engine it suffices to carry the key with you e g in your pocket Locking unlocking Fig 13 KESSY Designation of the areas and unlocking locking the vehicle 32 Using the system To lock unlock a vehicle fitted with the KESSY system it is necessary for the valid remote control key to be located no more than around 1 5 m from the front door handle or boot lid Unlocking the vehicle gt Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor 2 Fig 13 with the whole palm of your hand Locking the vehicle gt Touch the sensor 1 Fig 13 with your fingers Deactivating the safe securing system gt Touch the sensor 1 Fig 13 twice within 2 seconds with your fingers Unlocking the boot lid gt Press the handle of the boot lid Unlocking If a valid remote control key is located in the area A Fig 13 or B of the vehicle it is possible to unlock the vehicle via the relevant door of the area in which the key is located In the area A the vehicle can be unlocked by the handle of the front left door in the area C the boot lid can be unlocked If you cover the sensor 2 at the same time as the sensor 1 when unlocking the vehicle it is not unlocked Locking The driver door or front passen
255. m Fixing floor covering of the boot Fig 66 Boot fixing the floor covering fixing the Combi floor covering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 There is a loop or hook Combi located on the floor covering of the boot If you need to access the spare wheel for example the raised floor cover can be attach ed to a hook on the boot cover Fig 66 A or to the frame of the boot lid Com bi Fig 66 B Luggage net N is ay Fig 67 Boot Luggage net oo r A F 537 0319 a z ie Fj q Uy es iW f A a vi N o i f J an T Ve s First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 The luggage net is designed for the transportation of lighter objects FJ waRNiING Only store soft objects in the luggage net up to a total weight of 1 5 kg Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net as they can damage the luggage net Boot cover Fig 68 Removing the boot cover Me 91837 0320 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 The boot cover can be removed if you wish to transport bulky goods gt Unhook the support straps 1 Fig 68 gt Place the cover in the horizontal position gt Pull the cover out
256. matically if the air distribution control Fig 108 on page 95 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the button e E WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing ina traffic jam Switching on gt Press the button lt s 4 Fig 108 on page 95 and the indicator light in the but ton illuminates 96 Using the system Introductory information The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature This is achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the air flow the blower Stages and air distribution The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually The automatic mode page 98 ensures maximum well being of the occupants at all times of the year Description of Climatronic system The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met gt engine running gt outside temperature above approx 2 C gt
257. ment ings H on page 48 cluster is switched on as well i Switching on the parking light gt Turn the light switch Fig 30 to position xe Switching on the low beam and main beam gt Turn the light switch to position 20 gt Push the main beam lever slightly forward in the spring tensioned position to switch on the main beam Fig 36 on page 54 Fig Sl Dash panel Light switch Switching off lights except daylight driving lights gt Turn the light switch to position 0O a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 48 Switching on daylight driving lights gt Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position O or AUTO Switching on gt Turn the light switch Fig 31 to position AUTO Deactivating the function daylight driving lights gt Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds of switching on the ignition and at the same time slide it downwards and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds If the light switch is in the position AUTO the symbol illuminates when the ignition is switched on AUTO next to the light switch If the low beam is activated with the light sensor the symbol illuminates additionally next to the light switch gt Switching off gt Turn the light switch to the position O or 20 Lights and
258. ment Cluster Multifunction display onboard computer ___ MAXI DOT information display Indicator lights Unlocking and locking Vehicle key Child safety lock Central locking system Remote control KESSY system Anti theft alarm system Emergency unlocking and locking Boot lid Electric boot lid Electric power windows Electric sliding tilting roof Panoramic sliding roof Combi Lights and visibility Lights Interior light Boot light Combi Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear window 48 54 57 58 59 63 Seats and Stowage Front seats Seat heaters Ventilated front seats Head restraints Rear seats Boot Variable loading floor in the boot Extendable variable loading floor with integrated aluminium strips and fastening elements Combi Net partition Combi Roof rack system Cup holder Ashtray Cigarette lighter 12 volt power socket Storage compartments Clothes hooks Parking ticket holder The air conditioning system Air conditioning system Air outlet vents Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system Climatronic automatic air conditioning system Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation Starting off and Driving Starting and stopping the engine KESSY system Brakes and brake assist systems Shifting manual gearbox Pedals
259. mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an outside temperature of 20 C Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously gt Place the rotary knob into the position L The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob The adjustment of both mirrors simultaneously or each individual mirror is possi ble in the Information display table on page 17 in the menu point Mirror adjust Adjusting the right hand exterior mirror gt Place the rotary knob into the position R The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob Switching off operating control gt Place the rotary knob into the position 0 Folding in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob gt Place the rotary knob into the position amp The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position to a different one It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on and at a speed of up to 15 km h 64 Using the system Folding in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key gt If all of the windows are closed press and hold the lock button 3 Fig 12 on page 31 on the radio remote control for approx 2 seconds The exterior mirrors are folded back into the driving position after opening the door or switching on the ignition Tilting surface of front passenge
260. mp cloth If this does not prove to be ade quate the parts can be treated with special solvent free plastic cleaning prod ucts Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 169 De icing windows and exterior mirrors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass Clean the windows from the inside on a regular basis Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility CAUTION a Never remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water risk of for mation of cracks in the glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage a Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand and salt must not be removed from the window glass and mirrors risk of damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors Radio reception and aerial First read and observe the introductory informatio
261. mpleted by pressing or turning the buttons Fig 132 Multifunction steering wheel control buttons Button Action Radio traffic information CD CD changer MP3 Navigation Press briefly Switch off on tone or voice control Press button for a long period of time Turn upwards Increase volume Turn downwards Decrease volume switch off on Changing to the next stored radio station Press briefly Changing to the next stored traffic information Changing to the next title Interrupting the traffic report Press button for a long period of time SN YM eee Interruption of the traffic report Fast forward gt Communication 137 Button Action Radio traffic information CD CD changer MP3 Changing to the previously stored radio station Press briefly Changing to the previously stored traffic information Changing to the previous title Interrupting the traffic report Press button fora long period of time Press briefly changing the audio source Press briefly Call up the main menu Press briefly Interruption of the traffic report without function Interruption of the traffic report Fast rewind Display of the stored accessible stations Turn upwards scroll upwards Changing to the previous title Interruption of the traffic report without Display of the stored accessible stations function Turn downwards scroll downwards Changing to the next title Interruption of the traffic report
262. n and safety warn ings H on page 167 Car parks tunnels tall buildings or mountains can disrupt the radio signal even causing it to fail completely With factory fitted radios and navigation systems the aerial for the radio recep tion can be installed at different locations in the vehicle gt on the inside of the rear window along with the rear window heater gt on the inside of the rear side windows gt on the inside of the windscreen gt on the roof 170 General Maintenance Headlight lenses First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Use soap and clean water to clean the plastic headlight lenses CAUTION a Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause the formation of cracks on the headlight lenses a Do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products to clean the headlights risk of damaging the headlight lenses Rubber seals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 The rubber seals on doors the sliding roof and other windows remain smoother and last longer if the seals are treated regularly with a suitable rubber care prod uct This helps to prevent leakages and premature wear of the seals Rubber seals which are well cared for also do not stick together in cold winter weather Door lock
263. n before the ignition was switched on the mir rors will remain in the fold in position the next time the ignition is switched on The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position to a different one a Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on a f the power setting function fails at any time the exterior mirrors can be set by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface Contact your KODA specialist garage if there is a fault with the power setting of the exterior mirrors Exterior mirror with entry lighting The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror The light beam is aimed at the entry area of the front doors after the car is un locked The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the front door The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed or if the ignition is switched on If the doors remain open the lighting goes out automatically after about 10 mi nutes provided the ignition is not switched on Automatic dimming exterior mirror The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the interior mirror If the automat ic dimming is switched on the mirror dims automatically depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged the mir ror always moves back into the b
264. n equipment fitted gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system gt Operating controls for Climatronic Depending on equipment fitted gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox gt Selector lever automatic gearbox Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag ___ Park Assist Front and rear parking aid Depending on equipment fitted gt Ashtrays gt Storage compartment i Note The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items on right hand drive models may differ from that shown in Fig 1 The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models Cockpit 53 53 86 104 150 105 T1 25 94 97 112 121 153 113 112 83 86 7 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview of the Instrument cluster Engine revolutions counter Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge Counter for distance driven Service Interval Display Digital clock Recommended gear Display in rear centre console EI WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving only when the vehicle is stationary 8 Using the system Overview of the Instrument cluster Fig 2 Instrument cluster llls Nl
265. n for the unborn child page 146 Fastening and unfastening seat belts a Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck a Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated page 141 Correct seated position The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness a The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twisted or chafe against any sharp edges a A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then sud denly held firm by the belt a The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g specta cles ball point pens keys etc as this may be a cause of injuries a No two persons also not children should ever use a single seat belt togeth er a The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to pro tect and the risk of injury increases a The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by pape
266. n is switched on and the bonnet is closed Replacing the rear window wiper blade Combi gt Y 6 amp 2 The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed If the intermittent wipe is switched on the intervals are also controlled depend ing on speed gt Lights and visibility 59 The rain sensor automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper strokes depending on the intensity of the rain The rear window is wiped once if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for the third time the position of the windscreen wiper changes this counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 182 EI warnine a Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving page 62 a Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front a The rain sensor only operates as a support The driver is not released from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually de pending on the visibility conditions CAUTION a In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the w
267. n lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the jour ney Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition CAUTION Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points to avoid damaging the heating elements for the seat heaters Do not use the seat heaters if the seats are not occupied by persons or if ob jects such as a child seat bag etc are fastened or stored on them A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur Do not clean the seats using moisture page 172 Fabric covers on electrically heated seats i Note a The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity a If the on board voltage drops the seat heating is switched off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control page 186 a f the heaters for the rear seats are set to the highest intensity level 3 they are automatically switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes two indicator lights are illuminated on the switch Ventilated front seats Fig 57 Rocker switch for the seat venti lation B3T 0313 Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions
268. n the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary it is necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever ex cept P and N since the power transmission is never completely interrupted also not when the engine is idling the vehicle creeps The selector lever must be placed into position P and the handbrake firmly applied before the bonnet can be opened and work on the running engine can be completed risk of accident The safety guidelines must always be ob served page 176 Engine compartment 1 Applies to DSG BE WARNING Continued f stopping on a hill downhill gradient never try to maintain the vehicle sta tionary with the gear engaged by means of the accelerator pedal i e by let ting the clutch slip This can lead to overheating of the clutch If there is a risk of overheating of the clutch due to overload the clutch is opened automati cally and the vehicle rolls backward risk of accident a f you have to stop on a slope depress and hold the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling back On a smooth or slippery road surface using the kickdown function can cause the driven wheels to spin risk of skidding CAUTION a The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload protection If the uphill function is used when the vehicle is stationary or driving slowly uphill the thermal stress on the clutches is increased a f the
269. nce CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Storing a speed _ S Ma Changing a stored speed 117 Switching off the cruise control system temporarily 118 Switching off the cruise control system completely T8 The cruise control system CCS maintains a constant speed more than 30 km h 20 mph once it has been set without you having to depress the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power out put and braking power of the engine The indicator light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is activated EJ warninec For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel risk of accident The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions a Always switch off the cruise control system after use to prevent uninten tional use of the system CAUTION a Always depress the clutch pedal if switching to the neutral position vehicle with a manual gearbox when the cruise control system is switched on Otherwise the engine can rev up unintentionally The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels The
270. nce the accelerator pedal kickdown function is depressed and will shift down earlier frequently by several gears in comparison to a moderate style of driving Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driv ing is a continuous process Irrespective of this it is however possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rap idly The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear in accordance with the speed therefore enabling rapid acceleration e g when overtaking without the accelera tor pedal having to be depressed into the kickdown range The original pro gramme will be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again When driving in hilly regions the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill sections This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negoti ating an uphill stretch When driving downhill it is possible to shift down into the Tiptronic position in order to exploit the engine brake torque Emergency programme First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 121 An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are functional faults in the gearbox electronics All of the display elements illuminate or go out A functional fault can have the following effec
271. ncelled after negotiating a curve a The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails Interior lights at the front Fig 37 Interior lights at the front Switching on gt Press the switch in the area of the symbol Fig 37 Switching off gt Press the switch in the area of the symbol O Operating with the door contact switch gt Place the switch into the middle position On vehicles without an interior moni tor the middle position is marked with the symbol Fig 37 A If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled the light will come on when gt the vehicle is unlocked gt one of the doors is opened gt or the ignition key is removed If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled the light will go off when gt the vehicle is locked gt the ignition is switched on gt about 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed If a door remains open or if the switch is in the position the interior light goes out after 10 minutes to prevent the battery from discharging i Note a Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting that illuminate the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel These are switched on auto matically when the parking light is activated a Furthermore after switching on the ignition when the parking lights are switch ed on the door handle lighting comes on a We re
272. nd ings Fig 101 gt Fold the seat backrest a little forward gt Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking button clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest gt Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition guide the securing strap around the housing when the net partition is rolled up After fixing the net parti tion in place it is not longer possible to unroll the net partition 90 Using the system EI WARNING a After placing skis into the through loading bag you must secure the bag with the securing strap B Fig 101 The strap A must hold the skis tight Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding also refer to imprint on the removable through loading bag The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg i Note The through loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis a Place the skis and sticks in the removable through loading bag with the tips facing to the rear a f there are several pairs of skis in the removable through loading bag ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height The removable through loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist Fig 102
273. nd Indicator Lights 13 Driving time The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased appears in the display If you wish to measure the driving time from a particular point in time you must set the memory to zero at this point in time by pressing the button Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on vehicles which are fitted with an information display it is 99 hours and 59 mi nutes The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Current fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres 100 km You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consump tion The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in litres 100 km page 12 If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button B Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel After erasing the memory no val ue appears in the display until you have driven approx 300 m The display is updated
274. nd observe the introductory information and safety warn of the arrow ings H on page 82 Inserting the front ashtray insert Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder gt Insert the ashtray vertically downwards gt Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig 83 A Removing the rear ashtray insert the cup holder comes out gt Open the ashtray Fig 98 on page 89 gt To slide the cup holder in again press the middle part of the cup hold gt Grasp the ashtray insert B Fig 84 in the area marked with the arrows and er Fig 83 B and slide it into the armrest m remove it Inserting the rear ashtray insert gt Place the ashtray insert in the mount and press it in F WARNING Never place flammable objects in the ashtray risk of fire Seats and Stowage 83 Cigarette lighter Fig 85 Centre console Cigarette lighter front rear Usage gt Press the button of the cigarette lighter A or B Fig 85 gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket EJ WARNING Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper use of the cigarette lighter can cause burns The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn Therefore never leave children unattended in the ve hicle EM Note The cigarette li
275. nds oors If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds afterwards lights up for about 30 seconds without interruption and then flashes slowly there is a fault in the system of the central locking or in the interior monitor and in the tow ing protection monitoring page 34 Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Convenience operation of windows The windows can be opened and closed when unlocking and locking the vehi cle page 42 ia The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Individual settings Switching on Opening a single door gt Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door in the direction of the ar This selection function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The oth row Fig 10 er doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being Switching off opened again gt Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right in the opposite direction to the Unlocking a vehicle side door arrow This selection function enables to unlock both doors on the driver s side The oth er doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened again Unlocking the vehicle with the KESSY system This selection function enables to unlock all the doors individual doors both doo
276. ng played will have to be stopped gt by briefly pressing the button amp on the adapter gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel If the system expects a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by pressing the button on the adapter gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel Activating voice control GSM III The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 on the multi function steering wheel Deactivating voice control GSM Ill If the system is currently playing a message you will need to end the message currently being played by pressing the 1 button on the multifunction steering wheel If the system expects a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel i Note a The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted a The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction steering wheel with telephone control or a phone mount and adapter a On vehicles which are factory fitted with the Columbus navigation system it is only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this device Be dienungsanleitung des Navigationssystems Columbus Communication 135 Voice commands GSM II Basic voice commands Vo
277. ng they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can re sult in serious injuries page 154 Child seat a The airbag control unit operates with pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels e g additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a SKODA special ist garage a In the event of a side collision the side airbags will not function properly if the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure inside the doors be cause the air can escape through large non sealed openings in the door pan el a Never drive with removed inner door panels a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the remaining openings have not been properly sealed Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed only if the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed a Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed in the inner door pan els a Always have work completed by a KODA Service Partner or a competent SKODA specialist garage Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the i
278. ng down hill it is inactive Antilock brake system ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 108 ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thus helping the driver to main tain control of the vehicle The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during the intervention of the ABS The ABS deactivates if the brake pedal is released Never interrupt the appli cation of the brakes during the intervention of the ABS Traction control system TCS Fig 118 TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings fj on page 108 The TCS is automatically activated after starting the engine If the wheels are slipping the TCS adapts the engine speed to the conditions of the road surface The TCS makes it much easier to start off accelerate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable The TCS should normally always be switched on It may be advisable to switch off the system in certain exceptional circumstances such as gt when driving with snow chains gt when driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt when it is necessary to rock a vehicle free when it has got stuck Ensure the TCS is switched on again afterwards During an intervention of the system the TCS in
279. ng lights are not switched on gt the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position AUTO and the intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on 1 If both switch on versions are conflicting for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority 52 Using the system Settings The positions correspond approximately to the following car load Fig 33 Front seats occupied boot empty Dash panel Instrument lighting 1 All seats occupied boot empty 2 All seats occupied boot loaded 3 Driver seat occupied boot loaded CAUTION Always adjust the headlight range adjustment in such a way that a it does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming traffic a and the range is sufficient for safe driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 fig Note gt Switch on the light The Bi Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehi gt Turn the control dial Fig 33 to the desired intensity of the instrument light cle e g speed accelerating braking when the ignition is switched on and when ing driving Vehicles that are equipped with Bi Xenon headlights do not have a man ual headlight range adjustment control a The illumination intensity of the Information display page 15 is set automatical ly
280. ng the boot lid The function of the hand grip on the bottom edge of the boot lid is deactivated when starting off or from a speed of more than 5 km h The function of the hand grip is activated again after stopping the vehicle and after opening the driver or front passenger door or after pressing the button 1 on the remote control key Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twindoor system a An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after opening the door gt Remove the panel A Fig 16 gt Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the di rection of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors gt Replace the cover Unlocking and locking 35 Twindoor small boot li val ala a Yaani IF TWINGOQOT S5fiidili DOOL IIL Fig 17 Handle of boot lid opened small boot lid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 35 The small boot lid Fig 17 can be opened after unlocking the vehicle Opening gt Press on the handle at the bottom side of the boot lid Fig 17 A and the boot lid lifts up automatically Fig 17 B Closing gt Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing The bonnet locks auto matically The sm
281. nge of sensors The distance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle at the rear of the vehicle and about 120 cm from the obstacle in front of the vehicle A Fig 120 The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm B Fig 120 danger area From this moment on do not continue driving On vehicles with a factory fitted radio or navigation system the distance to the obstacle is simultaneously graphically illustrated on the display refer to the oper ating instructions for the radio or navigation system On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the border of the danger area Starts continuous tone 5 cm further away from the vehicle The length of the ve hicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer Activating deactivating the rear parking aid The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is turned on This is confirmed by a brief audible signal The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear Activating deactivating the front and rear parking aid The parking aid is activated when the ignition is turned on and reverse gear is en gaged and or by pressing the button Pa Fig 120 the symbol P lights up in the button This
282. ngine compartment overview 178 Checking the engine oil level 178 Replenishing the engine oil 179 Changing engine oil 179 Coolant 179 Checking the coolant level C8 Replenishing the coolant 180 Radiator fan 181 Checking the brake fluid _ 8 Changing the brake fluid 182 Windscreen washer system 182 There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the en gine compartment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety The vehicle s engine compartment is a hazardous area E WARNING Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key a f the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever into Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the selec tor lever into position P a Firmly apply the handbrake a Allow the engine to cool For safety reasons the bonnet must always be properly closed when driving This is why after closing the bonnet the lock must always be checked to en sure it has engaged properly HE WARNING Continued a f you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the ve hicle immediately and close the bonnet ri
283. ngs H on page 140 For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off gt Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly gt Check the tyre inflation pressure gt Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside gt Secure all items of luggage page 72 Boot gt Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals gt Adjust the mirrors the front seat and head restraint to your body size gt Advise your passengers to adjust the head restraints to their body size gt Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 154 Transporting children safely gt Adopt the correct seated position page 141 Correct seated position Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position gt Correctly fasten the seat belt Also inform passengers to fasten the seat belt correctly page 144 What influences the driving safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 140 The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed gt Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls gt Never drive when you
284. nition lock gt Briefly press the desired memory button B Fig 55 68 Using the system Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat gt The movement can be stopped by pressing the button 8 on the remote control key and opening the driver s door zw I Note Each time new seat and exterior mirror settings for forward travel are saved the individual setting for the right exterior mirror for reverse travel must also be Saved again Memory function of the remote control key First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 66 The automatic storage function of the driver s seat and exterior mirrors position when locking the vehicle can be turned on in the memory of the remote control key When unlocking the vehicle with the same key the driver s seat and the ex terior mirrors assume the positions stored in the memory of this key Activating the function gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold any memory button B Fig 55 on page 68 After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button at the same time press the but ton 8 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful activation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal Deactivating the function gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold the button A Fig 55 on page 68 At the same time pres
285. nition while driving If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available you must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory EJ warnine a In view of the high temperatures which can be produced in the catalytic con verter the vehicle should be parked in such a way that the catalytic converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials under the vehicle risk of fire a Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters or heat shields risk of fire CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and exhaust system a Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust system Introductory information Your fuel consumption any pollution of the environmental and the wear and tear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on three factors gt your personal style of driving gt the conditions under which your vehicle is operated gt technical aspects The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Consumption increa
286. nlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or replaced the system must be initialised by a SKODA Service Partner Only then can the remote control key be used again i Note a The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter a The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away page 27 a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control key Locking unlocking Fig 12 Remote control key Unlocking the vehicle 3 gt Press the button 1 Fig 12 Locking the vehicle amp gt Press the button 3 Fig 12 Deactivating the safe securing system gt Press the button 3 Fig 12 twice within 2 seconds Further informa tion page 29 Unlocking the small boot lid lt gt Press the button 2 Fig 12 Further information page 36 Raising the small boot lid lt gt Press the button 2 Fig 12 Further information page 36 Unlocking the boot lid Combi lt gt Press the button 2 Fig 12 Further information page 37 Opening the boot lid
287. nnot properly seal with tyre with the break down kit gt Get professional assistance If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value see inside of fuel filler cap gt Continue driving carefully to the nearest SKODA specialist garage at a maxi mum speed of 80 km h 50 mph CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting 203 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 204 Jump starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot 204 The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not start because the battery is flat Jump start cables are required for this purpose Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the dis charged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and in sulated terminal clamps Observe the manufacturer s instructions Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black EJ WARNING a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C In case of frozen battery carry out no jump starting risk of explosion a Pay attention to the warning ins
288. nse the relevant eye immediately with clear water for When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas mixture is several minutes Then consult a doctor immediately produced Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water If acid was Keep children away from the vehicle battery swallowed seek immediate medical attention Keep children away from the vehicle battery Improper handling of the vehicle battery can cause damage We therefore recom a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mend that any work on the vehicle battery is carried out by a SKODA Service Part mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over ner during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on a Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit e g through metal objects cables Possible consequences of a short circuit Melting of lead struts explo sion and burning of the battery jets of acid spurting out a It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light to smoke or to carry out any activities which produce sparks Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury a Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the engine the ignition and all of the electrical components and disconnect the negati
289. nt seat cushion Do not place any objects in this area it may damage the fan Do not clean the seats using moisture page 172 Fabric covers on electrically heated seats i Note a The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the same time Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces the heating capacity at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit to de tect the right seat surface temperature Fig 58 Head restraint adjusting removing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Adjusting the height of a head restraint gt Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as i required Fig 58 A This chapter contains information on the following subjects gt To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the safety but 70 ton Fig 58 B with one hand and press the head restraint downwards with the other hand H Introduction Adjusting removing and installing a head restraint Middle rear head restraint 71 Removing and installing a head restraint gt Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop for the rear head restraints fold the seat backrest forward The position of the front and rear outer head restraints i
290. nues to block the wiper the wiper stops automati cally after 5 attempts to eliminate the obstacle in order to avoid a damage to the wiper Remove the the obstacle and switch the wiper on again a The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C a The content of the windscreen washer fluid reservoir is 3 litres On vehicles fit ted with the headlight cleaning system the volume is 5 5 litres On vehicles fitted with auxiliary heating the content of the windscreen wiper reservoir is 4 5 litres a The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen clean er to avoid any smears The wiper blades should be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues for example Activating the windscreen wipers and washers Fig 47 Windscreen wiper lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 Flick wipe gt If you only wish to wipe the windscreen briefly push the lever into the spring tensioned position 4 Fig 47 If the lever is held in the lower position for more than 1 second the wiper wipes faster Periodic wiping gt Position the lever upwards into position 1 Fig 47 gt Set the desired break between the individual wiper strokes with the switch A Slow wipe gt Position the lever upwards into position 2 Fig 47 Fast wipe
291. o ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling Diesel engines Specification rina iau 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 4 3 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4 3 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4 3 If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling CAUTION Only the above mentioned oils can be used on vehicles with flexible service inter Petrol engines 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI Specification VW 503 00 VW 504 00 Filling level 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI VW 504 00 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI VW 504 00 3 6 1 191 kW FSI Diesel engines VW 504 00 Specification Filling level 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with fixed service intervals Petrol engines Specification Filling lev el 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI VW 501 01 VW 502 00 3 6 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI VW 502 00 4 6 vals We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil In exceptional cases a maximum of 0 5 of specification VW 502 00 only for petrol engines or specification VW 505 01 only for diesel engines engine oil can be used to refill once Other engine oils must not be used risk
292. o maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel Not maintaining this mini mum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as they may get caught be hind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no lon ger be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects e g child safety seat provided for this purpose risk of accident i Note a After a certain time play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle a For safety reasons it is not possible to store the seated position in the seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the seat back rest is more than 102 in relation to the seat cushion a When saving the driver s seat and exterior mirror settings any previous settings will be deleted HONS Controls for manual seat adjust ment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 66 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Pull the lever 1 Fig 53 up and push the seat into the desired position gt Release the lever 1 and push the seat until the lock clicks into place Adjusting height of seat gt To lift the seat pull or pump the lever 2 Fig 53 upwards gt To lower the seat push or
293. o the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed a The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle Front towing eye Fig 181 Front bumper Removing the cap installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 204 gt Remove the cap from the front bumper Fig 181 A gt Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop Fig 181 B and tighten as much as possible For tightening purposes we recommend for exam ple using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Do it yourself 205 Fig 182 Rear bumper Removing the cap installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 204 gt Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper Fig 182 A and re move it gt Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop Fig 182 B and tighten as much as possible For tightening purposes we recommend for exam ple usin
294. ocket gt If the electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is fully functional gt If the vehicle is locked with the car key and the anti theft alarm system is acti vated When the vehicle is locked the alarm is activated as soon as the electrical con nection to the trailer is interrupted Always deactivate the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is connected dis connected Otherwise the anti theft alarm system could accidentally be trig gered page 33 Anti theft alarm system Engine overheating If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale the speed must be reduced immediately Stop and switch off the engine if the indicator light in the instrument cluster starts to flash Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle page 180 Checking the coolant level The following guidelines must be observed page 21 Coolant temperature cool ant level The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating F WARNING The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic sit uation a Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle s entire electrical system as well as acci dents and severe inju
295. of up to 10 watts Please refer to a SKODA Service Partner for information about the possibilities of installing and operating mobile phones and two way radio systems that have a transmission power of more than 10 W Operating mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with the func tionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle The reasons for this are as follows gt no external aerial gt external aerial incorrectly installed gt transmission power greater than 10 watts EI WARNING a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Use the telephone system only to such an extent that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time a The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be ob served 126 Using the system I WARNING Continued f a mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in a vehicle without an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incorrectly this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle Two way radio systems mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags Never leave a mobile phone on a seat on the dash panel or in another area from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre an accident or a collision risk of injury a In the
296. of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off Starting off and Driving 103 SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower Note a The engine can only be started with a genuine KODA key with the matching code The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after Starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem a After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes a If the engine also does not start after the second attempt the fuse for the elec tric fuel pump petrol engines or the control unit for the glow plug system or glow plug system relay and fuel pump diesel engine could be faulty Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 207 or seek assistance from a SKODA spe cialist garage a We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car gt ore usting the steering wheel position B3T 0514 Fig 112 Adjustable
297. off the charger and remove the mains ca ble from the power socket gt Only then disconnect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery if necessary first of all positive then negative It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you re charge the vehicle battery using low amperages as for example from a mini charger Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or lower must be used until full charging is achieved It is however necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages so called quick charging Inspecting and replenishing 185 Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge We therefore recommend having the quick charging of vehicle batteries undertaken by a SKODA specialist garage The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging CAUTION On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth page 204 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 On disconnect
298. ol unit for headlight beam adjustment and headlight swivel con 5 i trol unit for parking aid control unit for park assist 5 Instrument cluster control unit for electromechanical power steering Haldex selector lever lock power supply for data bus AG 7 Valve heating air mass meter 8 Control unit for trailer detection 9 Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation 10 Adaptive left main headlight 208 Do it yourself Power consumer 11 Adaptive right main headlight 12 Not assigned 13 Diagnostic socket light switch rain sensor clock 14 Central locking system and bonnet lid 15 Central control unit interior lights 16 The air conditioning system 17 Not assigned 18 Phone 19 Instrument cluster windscreen wiper lever and turn signal lever 20 KESSY 21 KESSY ELV 22 Air blower for Climatronic 23 Front power window central locking of the front doors 24 Selector lever lock AG 25 Rear window heater relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation 26 Power socket in the boot 27 Fuel pump relay control unit for fuel pump injection valves 28 Electric boot lid 29 AG Haldex 30 Ventilated front seats 31 DVD pre installation 32 Front power window central locking system of the rear doors 33 Electric sliding tilting roof 34 Alarm spare horn 35 front and rear lighter 36 Headlight cleaning system 37 Heated front seats
299. oling system operates properly After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is quite normal and not an indication of a leak EJ warnine a For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the win dows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to demist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up i Note a The used air streams out through the vents in the boot a We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the in terior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys tem This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is oper ating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense re placement of compressor a To ensure that the air conditioning system works properly do not block up the air outlet vents with any objects Using t
300. omologised Recovery in conformity with the requirements for recyclability Indication of recommended gear EU Directive 2005 64 EC Use of recyclable environmentally friendly materials Weight reduction Use of recycled materials with the parameters of the Optimisation of high strength panels reduction nea DE AL PORTERS easy Replacement of spare wheel with tyre repair kit Reduction of energy consumption Use of energy saving electromechanical steering instead of hydraulic type Optimisation of efficiency of generators Optimisation of operating consumption and electrical current consumption Optimisation of aerodynamic and rolling resistance Additional aerodynamic spoilers Additional covers at rack CD covers Optimised cooling input grid additional seal Reduction by 15 mm with frame Ro Wi tyres wheels with low rolling resistance The green seal represents SKODA AUTO commitment to environmentally responsible behaviour realised in the GreenLine series it expresses responsible engagement towards the environment and sustainable development www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost
301. omplies with the standard EN 12195 1 4 must be used for fastening the load Seats and Stowage 73 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Fastening elements ings E on page 72 Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provi ded on both sides of the boot Fig 64 CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 5 kg Fixing nets Fig 63 Boot Lashing eyes and fastening elements Combi lashing eyes and fastening elements First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 The boot provides the following fastening elements Fig 63 A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets CAUTION Fig 65 Fixing nets The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3 5 kN 350 kg First read and on the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 Folding hooks Fixing examples fora fixing net as a vertical pocket Fig 65 A floor fixing net and horizontal pocket Fig 65 B WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of damaging the net Fig 64 Boot folding hook Combi folding hooks 74 Using the syste
302. on it is placing on the braking efficiency CAUTION a Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 158 a Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not neces sary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear a All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufactur er to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly i Note a If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically After the speed was reduced below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stopped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatical ly after accelerating or driving off again a Before negotiating a steep downhill section reduce the speed shift down into the next lower gear manual gearbox or select a lower drive position automatic gearbox As a result the braking effect of the engine will be used reducing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed intermittently not continuously a Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis or another combina tion of tyres and wheels can influence the functionality of the brake assist sys tems page 194 Accessories changes and replac
303. on the left or right carrier rail gt Press the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 76 and simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 4 gt Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place gt Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap gt Press the button 5 on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap EJ warnine The objects in the boot must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to objects or injuries to occupants it Note Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button 5 Fig 76 Moveable lashing eyes Fig 77 Moveable lashing eyes There are four moveable lashing eyes in the boot that can for example be used to attach the fixing nets gt Press the button 1 Fig 77 and push the lashing eye in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Fold up the clamp 3 Fig 77 and for example attach the fixing net CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Using the net partition behind the rear seats 80 Using the net partition behind the front seats 80 Removing and installing net partition housing 81 Seats and Stowage 79 EI WARNING a The belt locks
304. on which mode was last selected If the indicator light in the top right corner of the button lights up the Cli matronic operates in HIGH mode The HIGH mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic When pressing again the button AUTO the Climatronic changes into the LOW mode and the indicator light in the top left corner lights up The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed However taking into account the noise level this is more comfortable yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air con ditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied By pressing the button again it is changed to HIGH mode Automatic mode is switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air distri bution or by increasing decreasing the blower speed The temperature is never theless regulated 98 Using the system Switching the cooling system on and off Switching the cooling system on and off gt Press the button Fig 109 on page 97 The indicator light in the button lights up gt When you again press the button AC the air conditioning system is switched off The indicator light in the button goes out Only the function of the ventila tion remains active when no lower temperature than the outside temperature can be reached Setting temperature The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately gt The temperature for both sides can be set wi
305. ond sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leath er Washing with a high pressure cleaner First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation materi al EJ WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters CAUTION The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C risk of damaging the vehicle Preserving and polishing the vehicle paintwork First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 167 Preserving the vehicle paintwork Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if the v
306. onunciation gt It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise gt During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle e g passengers talking at the same time gt Do not speak if the system makes an announcement The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and direc ted to the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front passen ger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually spo ken digits the whole number at once or in the form of digital blocks separated by short pauses After each order of digits separation through brief voice pause all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system The digits 0 9 symbols gt are permitted The system detects no continuous digit combinations such as twenty three but only individually spoken digits two three 1 Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system Activating voice control GSM II gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel page 127 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel gt by briefly pressing the button on the adapter Fig 131 on page 130 Deactivating voice control GSM Il If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently bei
307. oot cover Automatic foldable boot cover Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 72 The automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover enables an easier entry into the boot gt Open the boot lid The foldable boot cover rolls up automatically in the position 1 to Fig 69 on page 76 gt The cover rolls up fully by pressing the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow 3 When the boot lid is opened quickly the automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover is blocked for a delay time of approx 2 seconds The function to automatically roll up the foldable boot cover can be activated de activated via the information display in the menu Settings Autom blind Introductory information The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg ea Note The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects Dividing the boot with variable loading floor Fig 70 Boot Dividing the boot with var iable loading floor 837 0323 Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves marked with the arrows Fig Removing the variable loading floor c h P B a B3T 0501 Fig 71 Boot Remove variable loading floor remove carrier rails Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eye
308. opening the driver s door or unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control Switching off the COMING HOME function The light goes out 10 seconds after closing all of the doors and the boot lid If a door or the boot lid remains open the light goes out after 60 seconds Switching off the LEAVING HOME function The light goes out 10 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control switching on the ignition or locking the vehicle If no door is opened the vehicle is locked automatically after 30 seconds Note a If the COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function is switched on constantly the battery will be heavily discharged particularly over short distances a The illumination period for the COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function can be changed by means of the information display Adaptive headlights AHL First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Switching on gt Turn the light switch Fig 31 on page 49 to position AUTO The AHL system is activated if gt the light sensor recognises a low light intensity gt no reverse gear is engaged gt the operation mode tourist light is not switched on The light sensor switches on the full outer illumination at low light intensity The AHL system makes it possible to change the length and width of illumination from the headlights The length and width of illumination changes automatically in relation to the vehicle
309. or several doors are opened F WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Engine oil pressures When the indicator light is flashing the engine oil pressure is too low The following is displayed in the information display Oil Pressure Engine off Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 178 Even if the oil level is correct do not drive any further if the indicator light is flashing Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EJ warninec If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Coolant temperature coolant level t If the indicator light lights up or flashes either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low The following is displayed in the information display Check coolant Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine check the level of the coolant page 180 and refill the coolant if necessary page 180 If the coolant is within the specified range the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the radiator fan Check the fuse for the radia tor f
310. orage box they may be damaged Map pockets are located on the rear of the seat backrests Fig 92 The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the specta The map pockets are intended for storage of maps magazines etc cles and otherwise must be kept closed On vehicles that are fitted with an anti theft alarm system the opened glasses E WARNING storage box reduces the effectiveness of the sensors for the interior monitor m Never put heavy items in the map pockets risk of injury l CAUTION Never put large objects into the map pockets e g bottles or objects with sharp edges risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings E Fig 94 Storage compartment in the front door in the rear door b Seats and Stowage 87 Opening the storage compartment E WARNING gt Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig 96 Use the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project so E losin r mpartmen that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired E Closing storage compartment gt Open the lid to the stop only then can it be folded downwards Setting height gt First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the ar row into one of the 4 fixed positions Fig 95 Adjusting in the forward back direction Front passenger seat Stowage gt Push the cover into the desired position compartment fi Note Push the armrest cover all
311. ormation and safety warn ings H on page 187 Changing wheels around If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend chang ing the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the dia gram Fig 165 You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life Storing tyres Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running can be maintained when mounted them again Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool dry and where possi ble dark place Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored up right New wheels and tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 Only fit tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and the same tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels The tyre wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type of tyre Tyres for example have the following inscription on their walls 205 55 R16 94 V What this means is Tyre width in mm Height width ratio in Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Diameter of wheel in inches Load index Speed symbol
312. ose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in per manent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving risk of accident a Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of tyres and snow chains CAUTION a f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 190 Spare wheel The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm Protect the tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel a Replace any lost valve caps immediately SA For the sake of the environment Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption Wheels and Tyres 187 i Note a We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres is carried out by a KODA Service Partner a We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Accessories Service life of tyres Fig 164 Tyre tread with wear indicators Open fuel filler flap with a table de tailing the tyre size and tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1 6 mm high wear indicators installed These wear indicato
313. osing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cool ing system for the storage compartment is not being used Storage compartment on the driver s side Fig 89 Dash panel Storage compart ment on the driver s side gt The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding open in the direction of arrow Fig 89 86 Using the system Stowage compartment in front centre console Fig 90 Front centre console Stowage compartment gt Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the area A Fig 90 in the direction of the arrow and the lid folds in F WARNING The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire Storage net in the front centre console Fig 91 Front centre console Storage net E WARNING Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0 5 kg in the storage net Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the storage net as they can damage the storage net a Fila Si Detail of the headliner Glasses a eee storage box eee ee eee a be st Se EPL pe pS eT Lee OcKeTtS IN the TronTtT seats Bh a YN Fig 92 Front seat rests Map pockets gt Press the button A Fig 93 and the compartment folds down CAUTION a Do not put any heat sensitive objects in the glasses st
314. ot be swivelled towards the side windows in the deploy ment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head air bag is deployed E Fig 46 Rear door Sun screen Fig 45 Unroll the sun screen Pulling out gt Pull the sun screen on the handle A Fig 46 and hang it in the bracket on the top edge of the door Folding gt Remove the sun screen from the handle A Fig 46 and hold it in such a way that it can roll up slowly without being damaged m Pulling out gt Pull the sun screen on the handle A Fig 45 and hang it in the magnetic brackets B Folding This chapter contains information on the following subjects gt Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets B and hold it on the han o dle A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the boot cover without Activating the windscreen wipers and washers 60 being damaged Automatic rear window wiper Combi 61 Alternative park position of the rear window wiper Combi 61 i Note Headlight cleaning system 62 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 62 Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields watches electronics etc in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets They can be damaged by the magnetic field E The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignitio
315. ot of countries sufficient adjusted by a SKODA Service Partner trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After l l l l l l o you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in Headlights with Xenon lights are adjusted in the menu of the information dis accordance with environmental regulations play page 51 Tourist light i Note i Note Detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars is available from Further information on adjusting the headlights is available from a KODA Service a KODA Service Partner m Partner z To prevent damage to your vehicle pay special attention gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and lanes In certain countries it is also possible that the KODA Service Partner network is gt When driving over kerb stones limited or has not been established yet This is the reason why procuring certain gt When driving up steep ramps spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be gt So that any low slung parts such as the spoiler and exhaust do not touch the able to make limited repairs KODA in the Czech Republic and its importers are ground and get damaged happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle required This particularly applies to models with a sport suspension and also when your maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done E vehicleis fully laden a
316. ox containing the vehicle tool kit must be removed It is important to check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel preferably every time the tyre air pressure is checked see sticker on the fuel filler flap page 188 to ensure it is always ready to use 190 General Maintenance If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adop ted H Replace it with a wheel having the appropriate mode and dimensions as soon as possible Temporary spare wheel A warning label is displayed on the wheel rim of the spare wheel to indicate that your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel Please observe the following when driving with a temporary spare wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Do not drive faster than 80 km h with the temporary spare wheel and pay par ticular attention while driving Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering gt The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the maximum inflation pressure of the standard tyres gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest SKODA specialist ga rage as it is not intended for continuous use gt No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the temporary spar
317. p Defrosting windscreen Switching on gt Press the button 1 Fig 109 on page 97 gt Press the button 11 Fig 109 on page 97 Switching off gt Once again press the button or the button AUTO gt Once again press the button The temperature control is controlled automatically More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 page 94 The air conditioning system 99 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Direct switching on off _ SOT System settings 101 Radio remote control 101 Changing the battery of the radio remote control C CSCSC CSCSSSS CT P Auxiliary heating parking heating The auxiliary heating auxiliary heating functions in connection with the air con ditioning system or Climatronic It can be used when stationary when the engine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and while driving e g during the heating phase of the engine The engine is also preheated if the auxiliary heating is switched on when the ve hicle is stationary and the engine is switched off This is not valid for vehicles with the 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine The auxiliary heating parking heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehicle tank The coolant warms up the air which if the blower speed is not set to zero flows into the passenger compartment Auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into
318. plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner F WARNING Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move wax risk of fire Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 171 Artificial leather and materials First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 The artificial leather can be cleaned using a damp cloth If this does not prove to be adequate these parts can only be treated with special solvent free plastic cleaning and care products Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors boot cover etc using specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and a specific cleaning agent to clean the roof trim Some clothing materials such as dark denim do in part not have sufficient col our fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat cov ers fabric or leather even when used correctly This particularly applies to light seat covers fabric or leather This is not a defect in the seat cover but poor col our fastness of the clothing textiles Fabric covers on electrically heated seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 Do not clean the seat covers using moisture as this can damage the seat heating system Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to
319. prevent discharging of the bat tery This manifests itself by the following gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system gt Where appropriate large consumers of power e g seat heaters rear window heaters voltage supply to the 12V power socket have their power limited or in case of emergency shut off completely Note Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehicle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during lon ger parking Driving comfort is not put at risk by any shutting off of consumers Often the driver is not aware of it having taken place CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Service life of tyres 188 Handling wheels and tyres 189 New wheels and tyres 189 Unidirectional tyres 190 Spare wheel 190 Full wheel trim 191 Wheel bolts 191 Wheel trim caps 191 Tyre control display 192 Wheel bolts 193 Winter tyres 193 Snow chains 193 EJ WARNING During the first 500 km new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appropri ate care should therefore be taken when driving risk of accident a Never drive with damaged tyres risk of accident Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by KODA for your model of vehi
320. r the side lights remain on to illuminate the parked vehicle if necessary a f there is a fault in the light switch the low beam comes on automatically a In the event of cool or humid weather conditions the headlights can be misted up from inside The temperature difference between interior and external area of the headlight lenses is decisive When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period although the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system Activating the function daylight driving lights gt Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds of switching on the ignition and at the same time slide it upwards and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds Fig 30 Dash panel Light switch On vehicles with an information display the daylight driving lights can also be ac tivated or deactivated via the menu Settings Lights amp Vision On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating the function daylight driving lights neither front nor rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn When the daylight driving lights are switched on the lighting of the instru
321. r at approx 2 000 revolutions An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe the recommended gear page 11 Recommended gear A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 151 Automatic gearbox gt Slowly apply the accelerator pedal However do not depress it to the kickdown position gt If the accelerator pedal is only depressed slowly on a vehicle fitted with an au tomatic gearbox an economic driving programme is automatically selected Driving and the Environment 159 Note Observe the recommended gear page 11 Recommended gear Avoiding full throttle V100 km Fig 152 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h kmh 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 BNH 0119 Driving more slowly means saving fuel Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consump tion but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehi cle The maximum speed of your vehicle should as far possible never be used Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds The Fig 152 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle Fuel consumption will be halved if only three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle is used Reducing idling Idling also costs fuel In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP
322. r contains information on the following subjects Battery cover 184 Checking the battery electrolyte level 185 Operation in winter 185 Charging a vehicle battery 185 E WARNING Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery 186 Replacing the vehicle battery 186 a The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection Automatic load deactivation 186 when handling the vehicle battery Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in Warning symbols on the vehicle battery the lungs Battery acid corrodes tooth enamel After contact with the skin the acid creates deep wounds which take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers slin cracks Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant development of heat Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the bat Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye protec ae tery vent openings Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield There is Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the ve the danger of suffering blindness If any battery electrolyte comes into con hicle battery tact with your eyes ri
323. r driving ability is impaired e g through medication alco hol drugs gt Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit gt Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather conditions gt Take regular breaks on long journeys at least every two hours CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position for the driver 142 Correct seated position for the front passenger 142 Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats 142 Examples of an incorrect seated position 143 F warnine The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants a Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is mov ing I WARNING Continued a f the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag a f the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt a The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel
324. r exterior mirror On vehicles fitted with the memory function for the driver seat the surface of the mirror tilts down slightly when the reverse gear is engaged and the rotary knob is in the position R Fig 52 This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the pavement when parking the car The mirror returns into its initial position after the rotary knob is moved out of the position R and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km h Memory for exterior mirrors On vehicles fitted with a memory function for the driver seat the relevant setting for the exterior mirrors is also stored automatically when the seat position is stor ed page 68 EI warnine Convex curved outward or a spherical exterior mirrors increase the vision field They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mir rors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehicles a Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles CAUTION Never mechanically fold in or fold back the exterior mirrors with the fold in func tion amp by hand as this will damage the electric drive i Note a If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the rotary knob they can only be fol ded back into the driving position using the rotary knob a f the exterior mirrors were folded in using the remote control key and if the ro tary knob was in the fold in positio
325. r mirror H FJ warninec The display lighting on the external navigation device may cause the automat ic dimming interior mirror to malfunction risk of accident i Note Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window in the housing on the boot cover is not in use or the light striking the in terior rear view mirror is not affected by other objects Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor so that they do not impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation a f the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off Additional rear view mirror Fig 51 Additional interior mirror The additional interior mirror allows the driver a wider field of view of the rear seats Adjusting the angle gt Adjust the mirror in direction of arrow to the desired position FJ warninc Concentrate at all times fully on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Use the additional interior mirror only to such an extent that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time Lights and visibility 63 Exterior mirror Fig 52 Inner part of door Rotary knob Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to the rear Heating of the external mirror gt Place the rotary knob into the position GA Fig 52 The exterior
326. r or similar objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly a Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jacket do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts a It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the belts for smaller persons EE WARNING Continued The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 71 The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belt webbing may im pair proper operation of the inertia reel page 173 Seat belts The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt tongue inertia reel or the lock is detected the rele vant seat belt must be replaced by a SKODA specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a SKODA specialist garage The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked ai Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts The physical principle of a frontal collision Fig 137 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear seat passenger witho
327. r the contact in the menu Phone book Voice Tag Record Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu FUR THER OPTIONS 136 Using the system Voice commands GSM III Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands CALL NAME After this command a name can be entered to es tablish a connection with the requested party DIAL NUMBER After this command a telephone number can be en tered to establish a connection with the requested party REDIAL The last selected telephone number is selected READ ADDRESSBOOK The system reads out contacts from the telephone book READ MESSAGES The system reads the messages which were re ceived while the telephone was connected to the control unit SHORT DIALOGUE The help is significantly reduced good operating knowledge provided LONG DIALOGUE The help is not reduced suitable for beginners CANCEL The dialogue is ended If the system does not recognise the command it repeats the first part of the help thus enabling a new entry to be completed After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of the aid After the 3rd error the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your o
328. racteristics as a standard tyre 200 Do it yourself I WARNING Continued a Do not drive faster than 80 km h 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering a Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into con tact with the skin SA For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in ac cordance with environmental protection regulations Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the breakdown kit a A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories a Immediately replace the wheel that was repaired using the breakdown kit or consult a SKODA specialist garage about repair possibilities Components of the breakdown kit Tm2ms LL 10 Fig 177 Components of the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 The breakdown kit contains the following parts Valve remover Sticker with speed designation max 80 km h max 50 mph Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core BENA The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core T
329. rection of the arrow 2 Fig 156 and the bon net is unlocked gt Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas spring Closing gt Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised gas spring Inspecting and replenishing 177 gt Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm do not push it in Check that the bonnet is closed properly Engine compartment overview Fig 157 1 61 77 kW TDI CR diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 Coolant expansion reservoir Windscreen washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler opening Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Battery below a cover i Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical le 178 General Maintenance 180 182 179 178 181 182 Checking the engine oil level Fig 158 Dipstick First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine Fig 158 Checking the oil level gt Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil sump
330. refore shift to a lower gear in good time or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake i Note It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P N or R Storing a speed Fig 124 Turn signal and main beam lever Rocker switch and switch of the cruise control system mal First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 Storing a speed gt Turn the switch A Fig 124 into the ON position gt After the desired speed has been reached press the rocker button B into the SET position After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator Changing a stored speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator to increase the speed gt Release the accelerator to reduce the speed back down to the preset speed However if the saved speed is exceeded by more than 10 km h for a period of more than 5 minutes by depressing the accelerator the stored speed is deleted from the memory The speed then has to be saved again Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Press the rocker button B Fig 124 on page 117 into the RES position
331. rently operating If the indicator light amp comes on immediately after you start the engine the ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the indicator light does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ESR is fully functional again If the indicator light amp lights up there is a fault in the ESC The following is displayed in the information display Error Electronic Stability Control ESC Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 110 Stabilisation Control ESC Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the indicator light 5 comes on after switching on the ignition The indicator light must go out after driving a short distance Traction control system TCS amp The indicator light flashes amp to show that the ASR is currently operating If the indicator light 3 comes on immediately after starting the engine the ASR can be switched off for technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the indicator light does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ASR is fully functional again If the indicator light 5 lights up there is a fault in the ASR The following is displayed in the information display Error traction control ASR Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 111 Traction control system TCS Note If the vehicle s battery
332. ries a Any work on the electrical system must be carried out only by KODA spe cialist garages a Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical con nections for the tail lights or other current sources CAUTION a The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving situa tions a Trailers that sway slightly are not always detected by the trailer stabilisation and thus are not stabilised accordingly a Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regulated a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres a When the ball rod is removed the mounting shaft must be sealed with an ap propriate cover This prevents foreign matter from penetrating into the mounting Shaft See the fitting instructions for the towing device Towing atrailer 165 Note a We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service in tervals if you tow a trailer frequently a The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decou pling the trailer a For technical reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the anti theft alarm system 166 Driving Tips General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing the vehicle 1B Automatic car wash systems 168 Washing by hand 168 Washing with a high pressure cleaner
333. rinciple sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 196 The anti theft wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them one anti theft wheel bolt per wheel can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided gt Pull off the full wheel trim from the wheel rim or the cap from the anti theft wheel bolt gt Insert the adapter B Fig 176 with its toothed side fully into the inner tooth ing of the safety wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer hexagon is jutting out gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop gt Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt page 198 gt After removing the adapter reinstall the full wheel trim or place the cap onto the anti theft wheel bolt gt Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible It is advisable to make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from a SKODA Service Partner if necessary We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit Do it yourself 199 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Components of the breakdown kit _ 201 Preparing to use the breakdown kit 20
334. rom the inside by pulling on the door handle again and then opened from the outside E Fig 15 Handle on the driver s door cov ered locking cylinder This chapter contains information on the following subjects Twindoor small boot lid 36 Twindoor large boot lid 36 Boot lid Combi 37 Automatic locking 37 If the remote control key or the central locking system does not operate the driv Emergency unlocking 8 er s door can be unlocked or locked manually gt Pull on the handle EJ warnine gt etl vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover and fold ensure dhanihe lect scronedenaagediaitencosingitne booulid Ghee wise the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock was closed risk of accident a Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning a Never position any body parts under the cover of the locking eye trim panel for the boot lid lock risk of injury gt Insert the vehicle key bit into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle Fig 16 Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid it could crack Rear door Emergency locking of risk of injury the door K Note After closing the boot lid it is automatically locked within 1 second and the anti theft alarm system is activated This applies only if the vehicle was locked before closi
335. rs are located multiple times depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre Fig 164 A Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other sym bols identify the position of the wear indicators The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points Tyre pressure The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insuffi ciently or over inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle Therefore check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey 188 General Maintenance The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 164 B The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa 0 2 bar higher than those for summer tyres The tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 205 50 R17 that are designed to be used with snow chains is identical to the tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 225 45 R17 The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres If the load varies greatly adjust the tyre inflation pressur
336. rs on the left and right vehicle side or to unlock the driver and front passenger door at the same time The other doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and gt 28 Using the system are only unlocked after being unlocked again using the unlock button on the re mote control key Fig 8 on page 27 or the central locking button Fig 11 on page 30 Automatic locking and unlocking All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of about 15 km h If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by press ing the central locking button page 30 The vehicle doors can also be unlocked and opened by pulling once on the door opening lever FJ warnine Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for exam ple at road crossings Locked doors do however make it more difficult for res cuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency danger to life Note a You can have the individual settings activated by a KODA Service Partner or you can activate them yourself with the help of the information display page 16 Settings a In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehi cle a Only the driver s door can be unlocked or locked using the key if the
337. ry electrolyte level is periodically checked by a KODA Service Partner as part of the Inspection Service a For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte level cannot be checked a Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start Operation in winter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 182 At low temperatures the vehicle battery only has part of the initial power output that it has at normal temperatures A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary re charged by a SKODA Service Partner before the start of the winter Charging a vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Only for quick charging Disconnect both battery cables first of all negative then positive gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red posi tive black negative gt Only now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device gt When charging is completed Switch
338. s tem will recommend a driving break again Switching on off The system can be switched on off in the main menu of the information dis play page 16 in the menu item Assistants Starting off and Driving 119 EI WARNING a For the driving ability is always the driver s responsibility Never drive if you feel tired a The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed Therefore take regular sufficient breaks during long trips a There will be no warning during the so called micro sleep Note a In some situations e g sporty driving in adverse weather conditions or in bad road conditions the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus mis takenly recommend a break The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving 120 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Introductory information 121 Starting off and driving 122 Selector lever positions 122 Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic 123 Selector lever lock 124 Kickdown function 124 Dynamic shift programme 124 Emergency programme 125 Selector lever emergency unlocking 125 EJ warninec Do not depress the accelerator if changing the position of the selector lever when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running risk of accident Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving risk of an accident Whe
339. s A F to the left by around 90 Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour mounted fixing eyes C to the right by approx 90 EJ warnine Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when installing the variable loading floor If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants Extendable variable loading floor with integrated aluminium strips and fastening elements Combi Introductory information The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg E Note The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects for example the fastening elements removed foldable boot cover etc Partially pulling out the variable loading floor lt 1 Aj r gt i b 7 f ae a N f ST f vs a _ T f gt i a lt Fig 72 Boot partially pulling out the variable loading floor Seats and Stowage 77 The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a Seat for example for changing shoes When pulling out the variable loading floor the front edge close to the rear seats is lifted at the same time Thus small o
340. s the button 3 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful deactivation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat gt The movement can be stopped by pressing the button 8 on the remote control key and opening the driver s door Seat heaters Fig 56 Regulator for heating the front seats rear seats The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the two outer rear seats can be heated electrically gt The seat heaters on the driver s and front passenger s seat can be switched on and regulated by pressing the button in the area of the symbol a or Fig 56 Al gt The heaters on the left or right rear seats can be switched on and regulated by pressing the regulator w or amp Fig 56 By pressing the button once the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3 which is indicated by all three of the indicator lights in the switch lighting up With repeated pressing of the switch the intensity of the heating is down regula ted up to the switch off The intensity of the heating is indicated by the number of illuminated indicator lights in the switch FJ warninec If as an Occupant you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend not to use the seat heating This ca
341. s adjustable in height gt Press the locking button in direction of the arrow Fig 58 B and pull the The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions head restraint out Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head 70 Using the system gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place a Pie 5S Rear seats middle head re straint Fig 60 Unlock the seat backrest lock the seat backrest First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 70 Folding the seat backrest forwards gt Before folding the seat backrests forwards adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests Removing installing gt Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the unlocking handle A Fig 60 and fold gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop it completely forwards gt Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 59 simultaneously press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flat screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place a Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system
342. s set and it is not raining the windows including the panoramic tilt slide sunroof will close automatically after approx 12 hours Switch on off the audible signal indicating activation of the anti theft alarm system Switch on off the central locking and automatic locking function also applies to the KESSY system Rain closing ATA confirm Central locking Window op Only convenience mode for the driver window or for all of the windows can be adjusted here Mirror down Switch on off the function for mirror lowering on the front passenger side when engaging the reverse gear Mirror adjust Switch on off the function for left and right exterior mirror setting simultaneously pare serung Restore the Convenience factory setting a This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor b This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat Lights and Visibility This is where the following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted Coming Home Switch on off and adjust the light duration of the COMING HOME function Switch on off and adjust the light duration of the LEAVING HOME function Leaving Home Pao nue Mgnt Switch on off and adjust the footwell light intensity Dayl dri light Switch on off the DAY LIGHT function Switch on off the function for automatic rear window wiping Rear wiper
343. ses during the winter or under difficult condi tions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a result of outside temperatures the weather and driving style The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the ve hicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works SKODA places a partic ular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle Looking ahead when driving A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore unnec essary accelerating and braking should be avoided If looking ahead when driving less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coast to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Shifting to save energy Fig 151 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 BNH 0102 Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gea
344. sibility to change the name of the telephone unit pre set SKODA UHV Settings The following menu items can be selected in the menu Settings Phone book Update List Surname First name Ring tone Back Return in the basic menu of the telephone Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II hands free system includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the radio or navigation system The following functions are included in the universal telephone preinstallation GSM Ill gt Phone Phonebook page 128 gt Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel page 127 gt Operation of the telephone via the information display page 133 gt Voice control of the telephone page 135 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 137 gt Internet connection page 134 gt Display of SMS messages page 133 Communication 131 All communication between a telephone and the hands free system of your vehi cle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth technology rSAP Remote SIM access profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile the telephone deregisters from the GSM network and communication with the network is only enabled by the control unit via the vehicle s external aerial In the telephon
345. sign Each time you fit other wheels e g light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres you must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly Winter tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C because of their construction width rubber blend tread pattern This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with low profile tyres or high speed tyres code index H or V on wall of tyre To achieve the best possible handling properties winter tyres must be fitted on all 4 wheels the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must be no older than 4 years Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher SA For the sake of the environment Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling prop erties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is
346. sk of an accident Keep children clear of the engine compartment Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such fluids e g the antifreeze con tained in the coolant may ignite a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the en gine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot cool ant Do not leave any items such as cloths or tools in the engine compartment If you wish to work under the vehicle you must secure the vehicle from roll ing away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not sufficient for this risk of injury If any inspection work has to be carried out when the engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts e g V belt alternator radiator fan and the high voltage ignition system The following must also be ob served Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts hazard Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clo
347. special equipment model variants or market dependent equipment Consequently this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment compo nents described in these operating instructions The level of equipment of your vehicle refers to your purchase contract of the ve hicle For more information contact your local SKODA retailer The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only inten ded for general information The Service Plan gt includes vehicle data including information on service work performed gt is a record of services provided gt is provided for entries relating to the mobility warranty valid only for some countries gt serves as warranty certificate of the SKODA dealer The service records are one of the conditions for warranty claims Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to a SKODA specialist garage If the Service Schedule is missing or worn please contact the KODA specialist garage that regularly services your car You will receive a duplicate in which the previously carried out service work is confirmed by the SKODA specialist garage The Help on the Road brochure The brochure contains the important emergency telephone numbers as well as telephone numbers and contact addresses of SKODA Service Partners in different countries Abbreviations Using the system Cockpit Overview Instruments and Indicator Lights Instru
348. ss the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the igni tion is on EI warnine Never engage reverse gear when driving risk of accident i Note If not in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mecha nism to wear excessively Pedals The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances In the driver s footwell only a footmat which is attached to the two correspond ing attachment points may be used 112 Using the system Only use footmats from the range of SKODA Original Accessories which are fitted to two attachment points EI WARNING No objects are allowed in the driver s footwell risk of obstruction or limita tion in operating the pedal Parking aid AB 4 A a N AA i m B3T 0515 Fig 120 Parking aid Range of the sensors activating the parking aid The parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bumper and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors The sensors are integrated in the front rear bumper The signal tones for the front parking aid sound higher than for the rear parking aid The tones of the parking aid can be adapted in the menu of the Information display page 16 Ra
349. ssembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2 gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable material gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer Driving andthe Environment 161 gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of gt Use of water soluble paints the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to pro tecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODA vehicles When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers To prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled the headlights must be can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a l
350. stance of 25 cm 1 to the steering wheel Fig 112 on page 104 B Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidently change during the journey risk of accident a f the steering wheel is adjusted further towards the head the protection provided by the driver airbag in the event of an accident is reduced Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed BE WARNING Continued a When driving the ignition key must always be in the position 2 Fig 113 on page 105 ignition switched on without the engine running This position is indicated by the indicator lights coming on If this is not the case it could re sult in unexpected locking of the steering wheel risk of accident Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steering wheel could block risk of accident a When le
351. steering wheel Lever below the steering wheel safe distance to the steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted 104 Using the system gt First of all adjust the driver s seat page 66 gt Pull the lever below the steering wheel down Fig 112 A gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop Electromechanical power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force With the electromechanical power steering the steering assist is automatically adapted to the speed and to the steering angle It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the en gine is not running vehicle being towed in However greater physical effort is required to turn the steering wheel If there is a fault in the power steering the indicator light or lights up in the instrument cluster page 21 Electronic immobiliser First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when t
352. sure of your hand do not knock the full wheel trim Heavy knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into the wheel can result in damage to the guide and centring elements of the full wheel trim a First of all check that the theft deterrent wheel bolt is located in the hole near the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a theft deterrent wheel bolt page 199 Securing wheels against theft f wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 187 Pull off the wheel trim cap on light alloy wheels Pulling off gt Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit Fig 168 n Fig 167 Remove the cap Wheels and Tyres 191 Tyre control display Fig 169 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 The tyre control display compares the speed and thus the rolling circumference of the individual wheels with the help of the ABS sensors If the rolling circumfer ence of a wheel is changed the indicator light in the instrument clus ter page 25 Tyre control display U and an audible signal sounds The rolling circumference of the tyre can chang
353. system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times Even af ter just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you Start the engine up again 160 Driving Tips If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particularly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the engine has Started whereby high engine speeds should be avoided Regular servicing A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a SKODA specialist garage you create the conditions needed for driving economically The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Also check the oil level when refuelling Oil consumption is dependent to a con siderable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil consumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driving It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and rea ches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km SA For the sake of the env
354. t gt The gearbox only shifts into certain gears gt The reverse gear R cannot be used gt The manual shift programme is switched off in emergency mode i Note If the gearbox has switched to emergency mode drive to a KODA specialist ga rage to have the fault rectified Selector lever emergency unlocking Fig 128 Selector lever emergency unlocking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 In case of interruption of the power supply e g flat vehicle battery defective fuse or defect of the selector lever lock the selector lever can no longer be shif ted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Grasp the selector lever cover in the area of arrow 1 Fig 128 and carefully pull upwards gt Also unlock the cover on the other side gt Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Simultaneously press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and shift the lever into the position N if the selector lever is shifted back into the position P it is blocked again Automatic gearbox 125 Mobile phones and two way radio systems SKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power
355. t The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort Fig 62 seat backrests g Fig 61 Folding the seat cushion for This chapter contains information on the following subjects EDGE Class N1 vehicles 73 Fastening elements 74 Folding hooks 74 Fixing nets 74 Fixing floor covering of the boot 75 Luggage net 75 Boot cover 75 gt Pull up the seat cushion in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 61 and fold for Foldable boot cover Comb C C C C S CS S S C _sSC wards in the direction of the arrow 2 Automatic foldable boot cover Combi 76 i Note Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling char acteristics of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the fixing net page 74 To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible the rear head re straints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards Store the re moved head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled a 72 Using the system In the event of an accident there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and the weight of the obj
356. t The guidelines and instructions issued by SKODA must be observed when mak ing technical changes Adhering to the prescribed procedures will prevent any kind of damage to the ve hicle and its travelling and operating safety will be maintained The vehicle also complies with German road transport regulations StVZO More information is available from a SKODA Service Partner who can also perform the necessary work correctly Vehicles with special built on types Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to hand over later to the old car user This ensures the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to opera tional faults This interference can also impair not directly affected systems be cause of the networking of the electronic components In other words the vehi cle s roadworthiness may be put at risk and increased wear on parts may arise Any damage caused by technical changes made without consent by SKODA is ex cluded from the warranty see the warranty certificate 194 General Maintenance EI warnine a Work or modifications on your vehicle which have been carried out unpro fessionally can cause operational faults risk of accident a We advise you in your own interest to only use KODA Original Accessories and SKODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for
357. t e g 50 km h with the button A on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel gt Use the button B on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm the desired speed limit or wait a few seconds and the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing This allows you to set the speed in 5 km h intervals Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt With the button A Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel select the menu item Warning against excessive speeds gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt Use the button B on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the current speed as the speed limit the value flashes If you wish to change the set speed limit it is changed in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Press repeatedly the button B on the windscreen wiper lever or use the ad justment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm the desired speed limit or wait a few seconds and the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing Change or delete speed limit gt With the button A Fig 6 on page 13 on the windscreen wiper lever or the adjustment wheel
358. t by a SKODA specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork a It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de ployed a The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life a If you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de activating the front passenger airbag must be included When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to comply with the national legal requirements When are the airbags deployed The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultaneous ly The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration
359. t read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 Replacing bulbs gt Grasp the cover in the areas marked by the arrows Fig 188 A and remove it gt Insert your hand into the opening left by the cover and press the lug 3 Fig 188 gt Remove the front fog lamp 212 Do it yourself gt Turn the connector 1 daylight driving light or 2 fog light with the bulb in an anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove gt Replace the lamp insert the connector with the new bulb and turn in a clock wise direction to the the stop gt To re install the fog light first of all place the fog light with the lug on the side opposite the license plate gt Press in the fog lamp on the side closest to the license plate The lug must en gage firmly gt To reinstall the cover first of all insert part of the cover starting on the side fac ing the fog light Then press the cover on the side closest to the license plate The cover must engage firmly Tail lamp assembly light Fig 190 Outer part of the tail light Bulbs Inner part of the tail light Bulbs First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 Overview of the location of the bulbs Fig 190 1 Turn signal lights 2 Parking lights Brake light 3 parking lights 4 Reversing light 5 Rear fog light Removing and installing the
360. t some of the information 12 Using the system E WARNING a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature dis play that there is no ice on the road Even at temperatures around 4 C black ice may still be on the road surface warning drive with care CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display e g when cleaning to prevent any possible damage i Note a In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas ures a If the display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display Fig 5 Multifunction display 40 TELERIS A e0 i SS vu alt R Z Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 12 The multifunction display is equipped with two automatic memories The selected memory is shown in the Display Fig 5 The data of the single trip memory memory 1 is shown if a 1 appears in the dis play A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance mem ory memory 2 gt Switching over the memory using the button B Fig 6 on page 13 on the wind screen wiper lever or using the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steer ing wheel
361. tch into the position and lock the vehicle Note a The parking light P can only be activated if the ignition is switched off a f the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light is not automatically switched on 50 Using the system COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 When it is dark this function makes it possible to switch on the lights for a short time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle Switching on the COMING HOME function gt The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control AUTO gt Switch off the ignition gt The light switches on after the driver s door is opened Switching on the LEAVING HOME function gt After leaving the vehicle the light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control AUTO gt Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control and the light is switched on Depending on the equipment fitted the COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function switches on the following lights gt Parking lights gt Low beam gt Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors gt Licence plate light The COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the interior rear mirror If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light sensor the light is not switched on after
362. tching plugs to avoid damaging the 12 volt power socket Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives a Before turning the ignition on or off and before starting the car switch off the device connected to the 12 volt power socket to prevent any damage caused by voltage fluctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices i Note The 12 volt power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical ac cessories with a power uptake of up to 120 watt Overview The vehicle has the following storage compartments Storage compartment on the front passenger side page 85 Storage compartment on the driver s side page 86 Stowage compartment in front centre console page 86 Storage net in the front centre console page 86 Map pockets in the front seats page 87 Glasses storage box page 87 Storage compartments in the doors page 87 Stowage compartment below front passenger seat page 88 Front armrest with storage compartment page 88 Rear armrest with storage compartment page 88 Stowage compartment in rear centre console page 89 Stowage compartment for an umbrella page 89 Seat backrest with through loading channel page 89 Removable through loading bag page 90 Side compartments in the boot page 90 Lockable side compartment Combi pag
363. temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays accentuate this caustic effect It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter Automatic car wash systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 168 General Maintenance Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car wash systems The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system closing the windows including the sliding tilting roof etc If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts such as a spoiler roof luggage rack two way radio aerial it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing through the automatic vehicle wash system Washing by hand First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 When washing by hand first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off as much as possible Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a sec
364. tems of cloth ing a Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case a Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by SKODA In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non ap proved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired without delay by your SKODA specialist garage a The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the mod ules Airbagsystem 151 Head airbags Fig 145 Location of the head airbag gas filled head airbag In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car Fig 145 A In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the rele vant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the acci dent occurs When deployed the airbags cover the side window and
365. ter page 130 gt Operation of the telephone via the information display page 131 gt Voice control of the telephone page 135 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 137 All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle s hands free system is established with the help of Bluetooth technology The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the vehicle s exter nal aerial Note The following guidelines must be observed page 126 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system the two devices must be paired Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the menu Phone New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If the hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN within 30 seconds and wait until the connec tion is established gt After terminating the connection confirm the creation of a new user profil
366. th a cold start of the engine Afterwards urban driving is simulated In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km h The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra urban cycle E WARNING Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights risk of accident and damage Note a f required you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle by contacting a KODA Service Partner a Depending on the range of equipment style of driving traffic situation weather influences and vehicle condition consumption values may deviate from the indi cated values Technical data 217 Dimensions Dimensions mm Length 4838 484997 Superb GreenLine 4838 4849 Estate car 4838 48497 Combi GreenLine 4838 4849 Width 1817 1817 1817 1817 Width including exterior mirror 2009 2009 2009 2009 Height 1462 1482 1447 1464 1449 1510 1529 1497 1495 1511 14969 Clearance 139 158 1239 140 1259 141 159 1279 1269 141 1269 Wheel base 2761 2761 2761 2761 Track gauge front rear a Applies to vehicles with an appearance package b Applies to vehicles with a rough road package Applies to vehicles wi
367. th a sport chassis d Applies to vehicles with a sport chassis and a 3 6 191 kW engine Applies to vehicles with a 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine 218 Technical data 1545 1518 1537 1510 1545 1521 1545 1517 1537 1510 1545 1521 Specification and engine oil capacity The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use through out the year except in extreme climate zones Various oils can be mixed together when refilling However this does not apply to vehicles with flexible service intervals Engine oils are of course undergoing continuous further development Thus the information stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publica tion SKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by SKODA We therefore recommend that the oil change is completed by a SKODA Service Part ner The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capacities include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 178 Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with flexible service intervals Petrol engines 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI Specification VW 502 00 Filling lev el 4 6 3 6 1 191 kW FSI VW 502 00 5 5 If the oils specified above are not available oils according t
368. th the control dial 7 Fig 109 on page 97 after switching on the ignition gt If you wish to set the temperature for the right side turn the control dial 14 The indicator light in the button lights up this indicates that differing temperatures for the left and right side can be set If the indicator light in the button DUAL 12 Fig 109 on page 97 is illuminated the temperature for both sides cannot be set with the control dial 7 You can re activate this function by pressing the button DUAL The indicator light in the but ton goes out The interior temperature can be set between 18 C and 26 C The interior tem perature is regulated automatically within this range If a temperature lower than 18 C is selected a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale If a temperature higher than 26 C is selected a red symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity respectively The temperature is not controlled in this case Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode largely prevents polluted air from outside the vehicle get ting into the vehicle for example when driving through a
369. the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place l CAUTION a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery Unlocking and locking 27 Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions ia Note Introductory information When using the central locking and unlocking system all the doors and the fuel Please approach a KODA Service Partner if you lose a key as they can obtain a filler flap are locked or unlocked at the same time if it was not set differently in new one for you l l the menu item Settings Convenience of the information display The boot lid is The system has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked unlocked when opening The boot lid can then be opened by pressing the handle with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 32 onthe lower edge of the boot lid page 36 Indicator light in the driver s door After locking the vehicle the indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system page 29 is not operating Fig 10 the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out re safety locks on the rear and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seco
370. the individual operating elements changes The end posi tions of the lid fully closed in the secured lock and fully opened differ as well ee of symbols Feasible action Non feasible action lt gt Movement i in the opposite direction to the previous movement a of the boot lid using the remote control key and the button on the centre console When the ignition is switched on the operation of the boot lid does not function using the remote control key If the vehicle was locked from the outside the operation of the boot lid does not function using the button on the centre console Fig 22 on page 38 If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle the operation of the boot lid does not func tion using the remote control key or the button on the centre console Operation of the boot lid using the handle A The operation of the boot lid using the handle A is only possible when the vehi cle is unlocked Fig 21 on page 38 Operation of the boot lid using the inner button Action Operating the boot lid with the inner button B is only possible when the boot lid is opened Fig 21 on page 38 Audible signals Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 Audible signals are active during the electrical operation of the lid They serve as a safety function and provide information about the success of a perform
371. the roof trim with a brush risk of damage to the trim surface Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 167 SA For the sake of the environment a Used cans of vehicle care products represent a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations a Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Note a Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe pol ish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possible Due to possible issues with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle the special tools and knowledge required we recommend that this is completed by a SKODA Service Partner Washing the vehicle First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing and wax treatment How often the vehicle should be washed depends on a wide range of factors such as gt Frequency of use gt The parking situation garage below trees etc gt Season of the year gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High
372. the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available When towing the following guidelines must be observed Driver of the tow vehicle gt Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelera tor particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt On vehicles with a manual transmission only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not blocked and so that the turn signal lights horn windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be switched on gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the en gine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is re quired to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught CAUTION a Do not tow start the engine danger of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage or destroy the catalytic converter The bat tery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page
373. the unlock button on the radio re mote control The anti theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle Unlocking and locking 33 If the vehicle is unlocked within 45 seconds by inserting the key into the driver door the key must be inserted into the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15 seconds of unlocking the door to deactivate the alarm system The alarm is triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds When is the alarm triggered The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored gt bonnet gt boot lid gt doors gt ignition lock gt Vehicle inclination page 34 gt Interior of the vehicle page 34 gt Adrop in voltage of the on board power supply gt Socket of the factory fitted towing device An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the anti theft alarm system is activated How is the alarm switched off The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control or switching on the ignition i Note a The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years a Before leaving the car it must be checked that all of the windows doors and the electric sliding tilting roof or the panoramic sl
374. the vehicle and trailer If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connec tor you can use a Suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories If a towing device is retrofitted it must be completed in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications i Note If you have any questions please contact a KODA Service Partner Loading a trailer Loading a trailer The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum permis sible drawbar load must be utilised If the drawbar load is too low it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trail er is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination 164 Driving Tips Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 188 Service life of tyres Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces page 216 Technical data The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1 000 metres above mean sea level As the engine output drops at an increasing altitude due to the declin ing air pressure and therefore the climbing ability is also reduced this means that th
375. the vehicle interior by switching off the engine whereby the interior temperature is effectively de creased e g with the vehicle parked in the sun F WARNING a The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms risk of poi soning a The auxiliary heating must not be running during refuelling risk of fire The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of the vehicle Therefore if you wish to operate the auxiliary heating do not park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust gases from the auxiliary heating can come into contact with highly flammable materials e g dry grass or easily in flammable substances e g spilt fuel 100 Using the system EE Note a f the auxiliary heating runs the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank The auxiliary heating automatically controls the filling level in the fuel tank If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank the function of the auxiliary heating is blocked a The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating which is located on the underside of the vehicle must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked a f the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running the vehicle battery discharges If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer period the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehicle battery a The auxiliary heating only switches the blower
376. thing before completing any work Additionally the following warning instructions must be observed if work has to be carried out on the fuel or electrical system a Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system Do not smoke a Never work near open flames Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby CAUTION a Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage a Never open the bonnet using the locking lever danger of causing damage For the sake of the environment In view of the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids the specials tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that fluids are changed by a Skoda Service Partner as part of the inspection service i Note If you have any questions regarding the fluids visit a KODA Service Partner a Fluids with the correct specifications can be purchased from SKODA Original Ac cessories Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 156 Bonnet radiator grille release lever Release lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 Opening gt Pull the release lever under the dash panel 1 Fig 156 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be dam aged gt Press the release lever in the di
377. tial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card it is necessary to switch to the menu item SIM amp phone List Surname First name Own number optionally display your own telephone number on the display of the device of the person you are calling this function is network dependent Network depnd m Yes No Signal settings Ring tone Volume Turn vol up Turn vol down 134 Using the system Phone settings Select operator Automatic Manual Network mode GSM Automatic SIM mode valid for telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously support the operation of two SIM cards there is an option to choose which SIM card should be connected to the hands free system Change Phone Mode Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode Premium rSAP mode Hands free HFP mode Off time Setting in five minute steps Data Settings for the Internet access point ask network operator for details Switch off ph Switch off ph switches off the phone unit phone remains coupled Back Return in the main menu of the information display Internet connection A notebook can for example be connected to the Internet via the hands free system The control unit of the hands free system supports the GPRS EDGE and UMTS 3G technologies An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP profile The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary dep
378. ting Exterior mirror 64 Seats 69 Windscreen and rear window 58 Horn 7 Ignition 105 Ignition lock 105 Immobiliser 104 Indicator lights 18 Information display see MAXI DOT 15 Instrument Cluster 8 See Instrument Cluster 8 Instrument lighting 53 Interior monitor 34 Internet connection 134 ISOFIX 156 J Jacking points Raise vehicle 199 Jump starting 202 K KESSY see Kessy system 32 Starting 105 KESSY system Starting 105 Unlocking the vehicle 32 Knee airbag 150 L Lever Main beam 54 Turn signal 54 Windscreen wipers 60 Light Adaptive headlights AHL 51 Automatic driving lamp control 49 Cockpit 54 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function 50 Daylight driving light 49 Fog lights 52 Fog lights with the function CORNER 52 Hazard warning light system 53 Headlight beam adjustment 53 Headlight flasher 54 Low beam 49 Main beam 54 Parking light 49 50 Rear fog lights 52 Replacing bulbs 210 Tourist light 51 Turn signal 54 Index 227 Lights Indicator lights 18 switching on and off 49 Loads 216 Locking Remote control 31 Locking and unlocking from the inside 30 M MAXI DOT 15 Main menu 16 Settings 16 Mirror Additional interior mirror 63 Automatic dimming interior mirror 63 Exterior mirror 64 Manual dimming interior mirror 63 Vanity 58 Mobile phone 126 128 131 Conn
379. tion This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel 208 Fuses in the engine compartment 209 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses gt Before replacing a fuse switch off the ignition and the appropriate consumer gt Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat ing page 208 Fuses in the dash panel or page 209 Fuses in the engine compartment gt Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the cover of the fuse box place it on the relevant fuse and pull it out gt A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage Colour coding of fuses Colour Maximum amperage light brown dark brown red blue yellow white green orange F warnine Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the en gine compartment page 176 Engine compartment CAUTION a Never repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher am perage risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system a Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a KODA specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time a When unlocking and locking the cover for the fuse box in the engine compart ment it must be pressed on the sides of the box otherwise the locking mech
380. tion hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit H gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved continue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes page 202 EJ warnine a During inflation the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot risk of injury Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials risk of fire f you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sus tained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Get professional assistance CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest danger of overheating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again 202 Do it yourself Check after driving for 10 minutes First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not drive the vehicle You ca
381. tion in order to stabilise the vehicle The active driver steering recommendation is activated for example on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces Hydraulic brake assist The brake assist system is activated by the very quick operation of the brake ped al e g in the event of danger It increases the braking effect and helps to short en the braking distance To achieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be applied firmly and held in this position until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the brake assist system The brake assist function is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released Uphill start assist The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released The driver can therefore move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the slope without having to actuate the handbrake The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back The uphill start assist is active as of a5 slope if the driver door is closed It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off When drivi
382. tion provides you with maximum acceleration power When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown function is activated in the desired driving program This function has precedence over the driving pro gramme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current selector lever position D S or Tiptronic The gearbox shifts down to one or sev 124 Using the system eral gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range Dynamic shift programme First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre defined driving programmes Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most economical driving programme Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel consumption When adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal combined with sharp acceleration frequent changes in speed and exploit ing the top speed of the car the gearbox will adjust to this style of driving o
383. tle more before dividing the boot gt Press the safety buttons A Fig 75 and remove the floor with the variable loading floor page 77 This enlarges the space between the rear seats and the separation The variable loading floor is secured in the openings A against movement Install gt Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails gt Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings B in the carrier CAUTION rails Fig 75 Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged 78 Using the system gt Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings C on the floor until it clicks into place if necessary press the safety buttons A E warnine Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants Fixing set Fig 76 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap The fixing set can be used for dividing the boot or for securing the objects which are being transported Telescopic pole gt Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of the carrier rails gt Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 76 and simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place Tensioning strap gt Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening
384. tomatically activated after starting the engine The ESC helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it is being operated at its dy namic limits such as a sudden change to the direction of travel The risk of skid ding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the road surface The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle In the event of deviations such as if the car starts to skid the ESC automatically brakes the appropriate wheel 110 Using the system The ESC cannot be switched off the button 8 Fig 117 only deactivates the TCS A system and the indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up During an intervention of the system the indicator light flashes in the instru ment cluster In the event of an ESC fault the ESC indicator light illuminates in the instrument cluster amp page 22 The following systems are integrated into the electronic stabilisation control ESC gt Antilock brake system ABS gt Traction control TCS gt Electronic differential lock EDL gt Active driver steering recommendation DSR gt Brake assist gt Uphill start assist Active driver steering recommendation DSR This function indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommenda
385. tronic differential lock EDL 111 Electronic immobiliser 104 Emergency Automatic gearbox 125 Changing a wheel 196 Door locking 35 Hazard warning light system 53 Jump starting 202 Locking the driver s door 35 Panoramic sliding roof Combi 46 Selector lever unlocking 125 Sliding roof 44 Towing the vehicle 204 Tyre repair 200 Unlocking of the boot lid 37 Unlocking the driver s door 35 Emissions 216 Engine Running in 158 Starting and stopping the engine 103 Engine compartment Brake fluid 181 Coolant 179 Overview 178 Vehicle battery 182 Engine oil Changing 179 Checking 178 Replenishing 179 Engine Oil Specification 219 Engine revolutions counter 9 Environment 159 Environmental compatibility 161 Environmentally friendly driving 159 ESC Function 110 Indicator light 22 F Fire extinguisher 195 First aid box 195 Footmats 112 Front airbag 149 Front seats 66 Fuel 174 Diesel 176 Fuel gauge 9 gauge 9 refer to Fuel 174 Refuelling 174 Unleaded petrol 175 Fuel consumption 159 Fuses Assignment 207 Replacing 207 G Gear Recommended gear TI General view Cockpit 7 Glow plug system Warning light 24 GSM 128 131 H Handbrake 109 Head airbag 152 Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system 62 Headlights Driving abroad 162 Headlight cleaning system 62 Head restraint 70 Hea
386. tructions relating to working in the engine compartment page 176 Engine compartment a The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact with each other In addition the jump start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conduct ing parts of the vehicle risk of short circuit Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis charged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started a Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment Do not bend over the battery risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Keep any sources of ignition naked flame smouldering cigarettes etc away from the battery risk of an explosion a Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns Note a There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehi cle a We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist Jump starting Fig 178 Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle A flat ve hicl
387. ulty Visit a SKODA specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriate ly as you will not know how great the damage is Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 20 Brake system Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Handbrake Fig 116 Centre console Handbrake First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 108 Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Starting off and Driving 109 Release gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking button Fig 116 gt Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button The handbrake indicator light lights up when the handbrake is applied provi ded the ignition is on A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand brake applied The following is displayed in the information display Release parking brake The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than 6 km h for more than 3 seconds Stabilisation Control ESC Fig 117 ESC system TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 108 The ESC is au
388. unleaded petrol Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust sys tem a Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used a Inno case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content LRP lead replacement petrol fuels with met allic components may not be used There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system a Fuels with metallic content may not be used There is a risk of causing consider able damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system a The use of unsuitable fuel additives can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system Inspecting and replenishing 175 Diesel fuel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 174 Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the winter only use diesel fuel which complies with the standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia Winter grade diesel fuel will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions th
389. up of engine Fig 115 Emergency start up of engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 105 If the authorised key is tested unsuccessfully the following is shown in the infor mation display or information display of the instrument cluster Key not found or No Key The emergency start up must be completed gt Press the starter button Fig 115 and then hold the key to the starter button or gt press the starter button directly with the key Note During an emergency start up of the engine the correct orientation of the key must be kept Fig 115 Switching the engine off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 105 gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine by pressing the starter button Fig 114 on page 106 do ing so switches off the ignition at the same time 108 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information on braking 109 Handbrake 109 Stabilisation Control ESC 110 Antilock brake system ABS 111 Traction control system TCS 11 Electronic differential lock EDL 111 E WARNING a The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Greater physi cal effort for braking is required when the engine is switched off risk of acci dent Depress the clutch pedal when stopping or braking a vehicle with a petrol eng
390. use on your vehicle Reliability safety and suitability have been established for SKODA Original Accessories and SKODA Original Parts a Although we constantly monitor the market we are not able to assess or warrant the parts even though in some instances such parts may have a type approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing labo ratory Note SKODA Original Accessories and SKODA Original Parts can be purchased from SKODA Service Partners who will also professionally undertake the assembly of the purchased parts Changes and impairments of the airbag system Repairs and technical modifications must comply with SKODA guidelines We recommend that any modifications and repairs to the front bumper doors front seats headliner or bodywork be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner These vehicle parts may include system components for the airbag system FI WARNING a Airbag modules can not be repaired but must be replaced a Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled A modification to the suspension of the vehicle including the use of non ap proved rim tyre combinations can alter the functioning of the airbag and in crease the risk of serious or fatal injuries in an accident a Parts of the airbag system may be damaged when working on the airbag system or removing and installing system parts due to other repairs This may mean that the
391. use the hooks for hanging light items of clothing and ensure that there are no heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Parking ticket holder Fig 105 Windscreen Parking ticket hold er The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets Seats and Stowage 91 EI WARNING The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision 92 Using the system Introductory information The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The well being of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity The system prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling ef fect Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air condi tioning system page 96 or for Climatronic page 98 The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice snow or leaves to en sure that the heating and co
392. ut a fastened seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 144 The physical principle of a frontal collision can be explained quite simply Motion energy so called kinetic energy is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving both for the vehicle and its occupants The magnitude of this kinetic en ergy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is nevertheless the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with your hands is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 km h to 50 km h the forces that your body is exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a tonne 1 000 kg In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car such as steering wheel dash panel or windscreen Fig 137 A In certain circum stances you could e
393. ve terminal on the battery If you wish to replace a bulb it suffices to switch off the relevant light a Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery risk of explosion and caustic burns Replace a frozen vehicle battery a Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns a Never use a damaged vehicle battery risk of explosion Replace a damaged vehicle battery immediately There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and burns when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applica ble rules of safety Inspecting and replenishing 183 CAUTION a The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off otherwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system first of all dis connect the negative terminal of the battery Then disconnect the positive ter minal When connecting the battery to the electrical system first connect the positive terminal of the battery Then connect the negative terminal Under no cir cumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a cable fire a Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork risk of damage to the paintwork a
394. ven be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a dan ger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front Fig 137 B Seat belts 145 Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fig 139 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 144 Fasten gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 70 gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis gt Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle Fig 138 A that is part of the seat until it clicks into place gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of 146 Safety It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maximum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against t
395. veral seconds after the vehicle is started Diesel particle filter diesel engine page 24 Fuel reserve page 24 Airbag system page 25 Tyre control display page 25 Windscreen washer fluid level page 25 Thickness of brake pads page 25 Turn signal left right page 25 Low beam page 25 Fog lights page 26 Speed regulating system page 26 Selector lever lock Starting KESSY system page 26 Main beam page 26 Handbrake page 20 Brake system page 20 Fastening the seat belt page 20 Generator page 20 Open door page 20 Engine oil pressure page 21 Coolant temperature coolant level page 21 Bonnet page 21 Boot lid page 21 Power steering gt Dade 21 Steering lock KESSY system pag Engine oil level page 22 Electronic stability control ESC page 22 Traction control system TCS page 23 Antilock brake system ABS page 23 Rear fog light page 23 Lamp failure page 23 Adaptive headlights page 23 a Control system for exhaust page 23 were Glow plug system diesel engine page 24 EPC EPC fault light petrol engine page 24 F WARNING a If illuminated indicator lights and the corresponding descriptions and warn ing notes are not observed this may result in severe injuries or major vehicle damage The
396. visibility 49 If the light comes on automatically the side lights and low beam as well as li cence plate light light up at the same time If the automatic driving lamp control is switched on the light is regulated with the light sensor in the rear mirror holder If the light intensity drops below the set value e g when driving during the day into a tunnel the low beam and the side lights as well as the licence plate light come on automatically If the light intensity increases again the lights switch off automatically Rain lights If the windscreen wiper is switched on in rain sensor mode for longer than 10 sec onds or in permanent wipe mode position 2 or 3 page 60 Activating the windscreen wipers and washers for longer than 15 seconds the side lights and low beam are switched on automatically The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation rain sensor for more than around 4 minutes or is not switch ed on in the operation permanent wipe Note Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled Parking light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Parking light P lt gt Switch off the ignition gt Pull the turn signal light lever Fig 36 on page 54 upwards or downwards the side light on the right or left side of the vehicle is switched Parking light on both sides gt Turn the light swi
397. which oc curs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the rele vant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suf fer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt driver s front airbag gt passenger s front airbag gt driver s knee airbag The following will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt front side airbag on the side of the accident gt rear side airbag on the side of the accident gt head airbags on the side of the accident In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed gt the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt the hazard warning light is switched on gt all the doors are unlocked gt the battery in the boot is disconnected gt the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted fi Note A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle Front airbags Fig 141 Driver airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the dashboard Fig 142 Safe distance to steering wheel inflat
398. with the key operated switch Fig 146 on page 153 We recommend that you ask a SKODA Service Partner to switch off any other air bags Monitoring the airbag system The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag has been switched off If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment gt The airbag indicator light 2 illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes approximately another 12 seconds in 2 second intervals The following applies if the airbag has been switched off using the key switch in the storage compartment gt The airbag indicator light 2t comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on gt Switched off airbags are indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the indica Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed a A SKODA Service Partner will be able to inform you which airbags in your vehicle can must be deactivated Key switch for the front seat passenger airbag Fig 146 Storage compartment Switch for the front passenger airbag indi cator light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Deactivating an airbag gt Switch off the ignition gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 146 OFF gt Check that the airbag indicator light OFF in the displa
399. wn voice entry for the contact in the menu Phone book Voice Tag Record Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu FUR THER OPTIONS The music playback process is performed on the connected device The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played back via the hands free system can be controlled with the remote control page 136 Voice commands GSM II The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music via i Note Bluetooth from devices such as MP3 players mobile phones or notebooks 1 1 1 To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth it is necessary to connect The device being connected must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile refer to the terminal device with the hands free system in the menu Phone Bluetooth the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected Media player The multifunction steering wheel comprises buttons for setting the basic func tions for the factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 132 The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices A description is included in the relevant operating instructions If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or navi gation system The following functions can be co
400. ws are located in the armrest of the driver s door Fig 23 front passenger seat and in the rear doors Fig 24 on page 42 Buttons of the power windows A Button for power window of the driver s door Button for power window of the front passenger door Button for power window of the rear right door D Button for power window at the rear left door S Safety pushbutton Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety pushbutton S Fig 23 The buttons for the power windows in rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the indicator light amp in the safe ty switch S lights up it Note The window lift mechanism is equipped with protection against overheating Re peated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to over heat If this happens it will not be possible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating protection has cooled down Unlocking and locking 41 Window in the front passenger door and the rear doors open close Fig 24 Arrangement of the button on the rear door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that win dow Opening gt A window is opene
401. xtend their arms and hands out of the window a The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head air bags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the fitted accessories could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants page 194 Accessories changes and replacement of parts Deactivating airbags Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances such as if gt using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child has its back to the vehicle s direction of travel in some countries this must be in the direction of travel due to different legal regulations applying page 154 Transporting children safely gt not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjusted gt special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt other seats have been installed e g orthopaedic seats without side airbags The front passenger airbag can be switched off
402. y PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel lights up 3 Fig 146 when the ignition is turned on Activating an airbag gt Switch off the ignition gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 146 ON gt Check that the airbag indicator light OFF in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel does not light up 3 Fig 146 when the ignition is turned on Indicator light in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF front passenger airbag switched off If the front passenger airbag is switched off the indicator light comes on for about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on There is a system fault in the deactivated airbag Jif the airbag indicator light flashes Immediately visit a SKODA specialist garage F warnine The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag a f the airbag indicator light OFF in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF flashes the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident Have the airbag system checked by a SKODA specialist garage immediately Airbagsystem 153 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 154 Child safety and side airbag 155

1 - &scaron;koda auto

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents